JP2020072916A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening is successful .

Japanese Patent No. 2514417

However, with such a gaming machine, it may be difficult to improve the enjoyment of the game during a hit.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in playing a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a determination unit for discriminating the Jo Tokoro, advantageously Yu technique person based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes the determination result of the specific Based on the determination made by the determination means and the bonus game execution means for executing a special bonus game , a determination period for determining the determination period, which is a period until the determination result is shown, is determined according to the determination result of the determination. From the first state and the first state in which the game ball can enter as the state of the period determining means, the ball entering means to which a predetermined privilege is given by entering the game ball, and the state of the ball entering means. Also, a second state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball, and a ball entering state setting means for setting 1 in the privilege game, and the state of the ball entering means by the ball entering state setting means is the second state . Executed during at least the second state period based on the period setting means for setting the second state period which is the period to be set and the end of the first state finally set in the one privilege game. Specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by the second state effect mode which is an effect mode, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. As a type of, a first specific effect of a mode that is suggested to be in the first state, and a second specific effect of a mode that is less likely to be in the first state than the first specific effect, And a type determining unit that determines one type out of a plurality of types including at least, the specific effect executing unit executes the specific effect in a predetermined specific effect period. The specific effect is at least executed in at least one of the determination periods set after the bonus game is finished, and the specific effect period is when the first specific effect is executed, It is configured with an effect period of a length in which the first specific effect is ended in accordance with the start of the privilege game.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine described in the execution and determination means for performing determination of Jo Tokoro, advantageous benefits game to Yu technique person based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes the determination result of the specific A privilege game executing means for determining, and a determination period determining means for determining a determination period which is a period until the determination result is displayed according to the determination result of the determination based on the determination performed by the determination means, As a state of the ball entering means for giving a predetermined privilege by entering the game ball, a first state in which the game ball can enter, and a state of entering the game ball more than the first state A second state in which the ball becomes difficult, and a ball entry state setting means for setting one in the privilege game, and a period during which the ball entry state setting means sets the state of the ball entry means to the second state. In a performance mode that is executed at least during the second state period, based on the period setting means for setting the second state period and the end of the first state set last in one of the privilege games. As a type of the specific effect executed by a specific effect executing unit that executes a specific effect capable of suggesting the same game as the game suggested by a certain second state effect mode, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing unit, A plurality of at least a first specific effect that is suggested to be in the first state, and a second specific effect that is less likely to be in the first state than the first specific effect A type determining unit that determines one type from the types, the specific effect executing unit executes the specific effect in a predetermined specific effect period, and the specific effect is The privilege game is at least executed in at least one of the determination periods set after the privilege game is finished, and the special effect period starts the privilege game when the first specific effect is executed. In accordance with the above, the first specific effect is configured to be an effect period of a length that is ended.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main controller. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the special jackpot type It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special selection table for a disengagement, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the special selection table for a hit typically. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is the schematic diagram which shows the big hit and the flow of the pseudo interval production performed after the big hit ends. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of a pseudo interval production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production performed at the time of the start of a pseudo interval production, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the pseudo interval production at the time of a big hit. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the special variation end display period of the pseudo interval effect, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed at the end of the pseudo interval effect. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production|presentation performed in the special variation extension display period of a pseudo interval production, (b) is performed when it becomes a big hit in the special variation extension display period of a pseudo interval production. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect produced. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows special variation selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows special fluctuation control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the display variation pattern command setting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control procedure. 7 is a flowchart showing a display special variation end command setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flow chart showing the number-of-rounds command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows the inter-round effect start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing a special game effect end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (b) shows a special variation end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the period shortening process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special fluctuation control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the third embodiment. It is a figure. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the state setting table prescribed|regulated in ROM in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the transition of the game state. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter C2 and the big hit classification in a special symbol in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special selection change pattern selection table in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the pseudo interval production in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the payout speed selection table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows payout command setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a payment control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows payment control processing performed by MPU in a payment control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows prize ball control processing performed by MPU in a payout control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball rental control process performed by MPU in the payout control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main controller in a modified example of the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a RAM in a main controller in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an electric constitution. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the sphere supply setting table in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows sphere supply stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch time setting process performed by MPU of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the modification of 1st Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface and protruding toward the front, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage” are used. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during a high speed change, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, “a stage in the city”→“ It is repeatedly changed in the order of "Sky stage" → "Island stage" → "City stage" →... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the “town stage” is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third pattern display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as “thousand box” or “dollar box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. Be seen. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling a ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to a back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (second when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67). (Pattern) is drawn. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are four types of special symbols, "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit D", and the specific winning port 65a is opened as many times as the big hit type. It In addition, after the special game state is finished, as a value added after the jackpot is over, a game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player.

On the other hand, in the lottery for ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball in the ordinary entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the regular symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next regular symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, four types of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", "jackpot D" are provided.

When "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", and "big hit D", the special game state of the number of rounds corresponding to each big hit type is achieved. Specifically, the "big hit A" is a big hit (3R big hit) that the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened three times, and the "big hit B" is the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. It is a jackpot (4R jackpot) that is opened four times. Further, "big hit C" is a big hit (6R big hit) in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened 6 times, and "big hit D" is opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a 15 times. It is a big hit (15R big hit). In each jackpot, the length of the period (interval period) from the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to the opening of the next specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is constant (10 Seconds). Further, after each jackpot, as a value added after the jackpot ends, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends eight times. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol) from the end of the big hit until the lottery of the special symbol ends 12 times.

Here, "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called special symbol probability state (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, it shifts to the special game state. It is an easy game state. On the other hand, if it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (time saving of the normal symbol) refers to a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", which means that the probability of hitting ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the probability of hitting is lower than during regular working hours. ..

After that, after the jackpot of the special symbol, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol, that is, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 12 times, the special symbol This is called the probabilistic period. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the probability variation period of the special symbol is shown using the number of lottery for the special symbol. For example, if the special symbol probability variation period is 12 times until the special symbol lottery is completed, the special symbol probability variation period is described as 12 times. In addition, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol after the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 8 times, the time reduction of the ordinary symbol. It is called a period. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the short time period of the normal symbol is shown by using the lottery number of the special symbol. For example, if the special symbol lottery period is 8 times until the end of the lottery of the special symbol, it is described that the regular symbol time saving period is 8 times.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the short time period of the normal symbol and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot depending on the type of the jackpot. Is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type becomes "big hit A", the time saving state of the normal symbol continues after the "big hit A" ends until the special symbol lottery ends three times, and when it becomes "big hit B", the "big hit B" After the end of the special symbol lottery 6 times the special symbol is finished, the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued, and when the "big hit C" is reached, the ordinary symbol is drawn until the lottery of the special symbol is completed 8 times. The time saving state of is continued, and when the "big hit D" is reached, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued after the "big hit D" ends until the special symbol lottery is finished 15 times.

Further, instead of increasing the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or the electric accessory is released by hitting the ordinary symbol once. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, "special symbol high probability state" and "normal symbol time saving state", but after "special symbol high probability state" ends, "normal symbol time saving state" It may be configured so that Instead of the number of times the special symbol is drawn, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power, etc., it is always set to the "low probability state of special symbol". After that, when it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and shifts to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol". When the state shifts to the “high probability state of special symbols”, that state is maintained for any type of jackpot until after the special symbol lottery ends 12 times after the jackpot of the special symbols ends. Then, when the special symbol lottery ends 12 times after the jackpot ends, if the special symbol jackpot is newly won, the state returns to the "low probability state of special symbol".

In addition, while the "high probability state of special symbol" is continued, if a new special symbol jackpot, "high probability state of special symbol" is a special symbol after the jackpot of the new special symbol The lottery will continue until it has finished 12 times. For example, after the special symbol jackpot and the transition to the "high probability state of special symbol", when a new jackpot is drawn in the second special symbol lottery, the "high probability state of special symbol" is the new After the jackpot is over, it will be continued until the special symbols are drawn 12 times. Therefore, in this case, until at least 14 lottery of the special symbol lottery performed twice before the new jackpot and the 12 special symbol lottery performed after the new jackpot are completed. "High probability state of special symbols" will be continued.

In addition, when the special symbol is a big hit and the state shifts from the "normal state of the ordinary symbol" to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol", the state is that the special symbol lottery ends eight times after the jackpot of the special symbol ends. Will continue until. On the other hand, after the jackpot of the special symbol, until the lottery of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times is completed, if the jackpot of the new special symbol does not occur, the “normal state of the normal symbol” is returned.

And, while "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is continued, when the special jackpot is newly hit, "the time saving state of the ordinary symbol" is further, after the jackpot of the new special symbol is finished, the special symbol It will continue until the lottery is completed 8 times. For example, after the special symbol jackpot and the transition to the "normal symbol time-saving state", when a new jackpot is drawn in the fifth special symbol lottery, the "normal symbol time-saving state" is further changed to the new jackpot. After the end, it will continue until the special symbols are drawn eight times. That is, in the present embodiment, while the "normal symbol time saving state" is continued, when a new special symbol jackpot is hit, a time saving period (" (Continuation period of "time saving state of normal symbol") is updated.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is not more than three times. (For example, 2 times), or 5 or more times (for example, 8 times) may be set.

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and depending on the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the jackpot D) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37 performs a variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached symbols imitating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is arranged is displayed. , The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, in the case where the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a big hit, all numbers from “0” to “9” may be aligned regardless of the big hit type. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the same effect (pseudo interval effect) as the interval effect performed between the rounds during the big hit in a predetermined period (special variation period) after the end of the big hit. There is. In order to effectively perform this pseudo interval effect, it is difficult to predict the jackpot type depending on the type of the main symbol displayed when the jackpot is hit.

More specifically, a period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery for at least the special symbol eight times is defined as a special variation period, and during this special variation period, the jackpot as the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display image similar to the interval effect of is displayed. In addition, the sound output from the sound output device 226 and the lighting and extinguishing control by the lamp display device 227 are made similar to the interval effect during the big hit. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has ended once, and when the jackpot of the special symbol newly becomes a big hit during the probability change of the special symbol, and for how long the jackpot continues. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The display image similar to the interval effect during the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the main symbol is variably displayed in a part of the image displayed in the interval effect during the big hit. This variable display is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish it from the interval effect during the big hit, for example, by displaying it in a reduced size so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

In the pachinko machine 10 having the above-described configuration, the jackpot type to be won in a low probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot in which the player can easily recognize the main symbols arranged by the variable display in the third symbol display device 81) is a jackpot type. If the configuration is such that it can be discriminated by the type of the main symbols that have been collected, the player will know at least how many rounds the jackpot will continue. That is, for example, if the big hit this time is "big hit D (15R big hit)", the player can recognize that the big hit continues until at least the fifteenth round, and thus only the fifteenth round of the big hit gets the prize ball. There is a fear that it will be a work for. On the other hand, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if it is difficult to predict the jackpot type from the aligned main symbols, each time the jackpot round for the player is finished, It is possible to let the player play the game while having a sense of expectation that the round will be started (that is, the jackpot will continue). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when notifying by jackpot display (fluctuation pattern effect) that all jackpots will be selected, all main symbols are selected regardless of jackpot type. A main symbol that is easily selected or a main symbol that is difficult to be selected in a specific jackpot type may be provided. For example, in the "big hit D (15R big hit)", the main symbols with the number "7" are easily arranged, and in the "big hit A (3R big hit)" and the "big hit B (4R big hit)", "7" is set. It may be configured such that the main symbols with numbers are difficult to align. As a result, when the production in which the main symbols with the number "7" are attached in the variable display are aligned, the player is expected to expect the "big hit D (15R big hit)" with the largest number of rounds. You can Therefore, in the variable display, it is possible to make the player hope that the main symbols with the number “7” are provided, and thus the player's interest in the variable display (fluctuation pattern effect) can be improved. it can.

Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. When the combination of the big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and the player is suggested to be in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined action, sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times of entry is four. The number of balls to be reserved is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved spheres is one, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times are reserved. The number of times may be set below (for example, twice) or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for the initial value setting of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 31). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball entrance. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and in each of these areas, the sphere is left and right. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. When it coincides with the value of the random number that is a big hit set by 202a, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability of a high probability of a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special It is divided into two types: for the period when the symbol has a high probability state). That is, the first random number table 202a includes a first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability and a first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability. The numbers of random numbers that are big hits included in the table are different. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability of special symbols and the first random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability of special symbols are of the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7,107,282" is the first for low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a1. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 3, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values are "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" is a first random number table for high probability. It is stored in 202a2. In this way, at the time of high probability of a special symbol, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 30, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability and the random number that is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. Random numbers that are jackpots are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the random number value is input from the outside and the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The value of the first hit type counter C2 and the ROM 202 are provided. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B). As shown in FIG. 8B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 16" is "big hit A". When the value is "17 to 31," the jackpot type is "big hit B," and when the value is "32 to 94," the jackpot type is "big hit C," and the value is "95. When it is "~99", the jackpot type is "jackpot D". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of hits (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach is reached, the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into high probability of special symbols and low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “complete deviation” is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is narrow. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed". Further, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out-of-front/backward” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out-of-front-rear” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front/rear reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Here, the variation time refers to the time from when the variation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is fixed. For example, after the symbol variation of 9.6 seconds is executed, when the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.4 seconds and the symbol is confirmed, the variation time is 10 seconds (9.6 seconds+0.4 seconds). Is described as. Based on this variation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value), and a special variation pattern selection table 202e. (See FIG. 9C) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8A).

In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B), for example, as the variation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", Various "outside super reach" and "outside special reach" are defined, and various variation patterns for big hits are defined such as "normal hitch reach", "super hitch reach", and "special reach". Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type). Note that, as the variation time of the variation pattern effect of 5 seconds to 30 seconds defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, the variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is defined.

In the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C), the special variation period in which the pseudo interval effect described above is executed (that is, the period from the end of the jackpot to the special symbol lottery eight times, Alternatively, the variation pattern is defined in which the next big hit occurs within eight times and the period of time until the first round of the big hit starts). Although the details will be described later, since the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured to select the variation pattern of the variation period that is determined for each number of times of special symbol lottery, The special fluctuation period can be set to the same length period (8 seconds) each time. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round is 2 seconds. Therefore, if the next big jackpot is reached before the special symbols are drawn eight times after the jackpot ends, the period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the first round of the next jackpot is 10 each time. Can be seconds. That is, it is possible to match the period from the pseudo interval effect until the start of the next one big hit round with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect, which makes it difficult for the player to know that the jackpot is over and how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval effect, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d and the special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e do not necessarily need to define the period from the start of fluctuation to the finalization of the symbol. For example, the period during which the symbols are stopped and displayed may be a fixed value (for example, 0.5 seconds), and only the period during which the symbols are changing may be set as the changing period. Further, the period during which the symbols are changing and the period during which the symbols are stopped and displayed may be defined in different tables.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal symbol per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is a normal symbol. When it matches the value of the random number that is a hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined as a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table, for low probability of the normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that at the time of low probability (at the time of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the number of big numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the probability of the ordinary symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds×1 time". The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 31).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by elimination of power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power-off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 30). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 7, a special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a positive change. It has a counter 203e, a time saving medium counter 203f, a special variation in progress counter 203g, a prefetch probability variation in progress counter 203h, and a counter buffer 203i.

The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the 4th reserved area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) where the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, the jackpot lottery of the original special symbol is immediately drawn. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, hit/miss, stop type, variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as the prize information in the prize information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From this, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

Then, the predicted various information is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 wins the various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) as winning information. It is stored in the information storage area 223a. Also, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the value of the special variation number counter 223e, the pseudo interval effect described above is changed eight times. It is determined whether to end the production or continue the production more than eight times. Specifically, during the special fluctuation period (that is, from the end of the jackpot until the lottery of the special symbol is carried out eight times), it is not a jackpot, and by pre-reading, the 9-12th special symbol from the end of the jackpot. When it is determined in the lottery that it will be a big hit, the pseudo interval effect is extended until it becomes a big hit. This allows the player to predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the presentation time, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval can be improved.

In this way, in the main controller 110, from each counter value acquired according to the starting winning, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is predicted ( Is mainly performed, and for complicated processing such as processing for determining whether to extend the pseudo interval effect based on various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern), voice lamp control is performed. This is performed by the device 113. As a result, the processing in the main controller 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing that is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the lottery processing for drawing the game state to be transitioned based on the entrance into the first entrance 64. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity is used for the voice lamp control device 113, various modes of the pseudo interval effect can be set.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) like the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the right or left normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding first). Among the vacant areas of 4 areas), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for hitting a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a sphere enters the first entrance 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 up to 1 They are added (see S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 22, see S605 of FIG. 26). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 of FIG. 27).

When the sphere passes through either the normal entrance 67 on the left or right, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S805 of FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the ball passes through one of the left and right normal ball entrances 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. (S803: No of FIG. 28).

The probability variation counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 Indicates that the special symbol is a probability changing state, and if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability variation counter 203e is set to zero, and is a timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed in the final round of the jackpot in the main controller 110 (that is, the end timing of the jackpot). Is set to 12 each time. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, 12 is simply set regardless of the value of the probability variation counter 203e. After that, while the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol ends (S216 in FIG. 22).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery for special symbols is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start process, the value of the probability variation counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, based on the first random number table 202a2 for high probability, the special symbol lottery is performed, If the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 0, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table 202a1 for low probability.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The time saving medium counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is a timing at which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed in the final round of the big hit in the main controller 110 (that is, the end timing of the big hit). 8 is set each time it is determined that That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, 8 is simply set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203f. After that, until the value of the hour/hour counter 203f becomes 0, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol variation effect ends (S218 in FIG. 22).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for a normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, the regular symbol is selected based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S710 and S711 in FIG. 27).

The special variation counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not it is during the above-described special variation period. When selecting the mode of the variation pattern effect, if the value of the special variation counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that it is the special variation period (that is, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect). Therefore, the special variation pattern selection table 202e. The variation pattern effect mode is selected with reference to FIG. 9C. On the other hand, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the special fluctuation period is not in effect, and therefore the fluctuation pattern selection mode is selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d. The value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is cleared to 0 when the RAM erasing switch 122 is operated to turn on the power. Therefore, the RAM erasing switch 122 is operated to turn on the power when a hall is opened. Then, the normal state is started (a state in which the variation pattern effect mode is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d).

As described above, the special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) selects the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation period determined for each value of the special fluctuation counter 203g (that is, for each special symbol lottery number). Because it is configured to be, the special fluctuation period (the period from the end of the big jackpot until the end of the eight fluctuation patterns, or the next big jackpot within eight times, until the big jackpot starts Can be set to the same period (8 seconds) every time. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, it will be the next jackpot until the special symbol lottery is performed 8 times, the period until the first round of the jackpot is started (8 seconds until the jackpot is started, the opening period 2 seconds) and the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect, which makes it difficult for the player to know that the jackpot is over and how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is based on the winning data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) acquired according to the starting winning, when the pre-reading the lottery result of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 is the special symbol. Analyze the winning data as if it were the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol), or if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). This is a counter that indicates whether or not to do.

If the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. On the other hand, when the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0, the winning data is analyzed as if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, and the lottery result of the special symbol is pre-read. This pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is initialized to zero at the time of initial setting of the RAM (see S1014 in FIG. 30), and is set to 12 each time the pre-reading lottery result is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol. (See S612 in FIG. 26). That is, when it is pre-read that the special symbol is a big hit, 12 is simply newly set regardless of the value of the pre-read probability changing counter 203h. After that, while the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted each time the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is completed (see S614 of FIG. 26).

When the pre-reading of the lottery in the special symbol is performed and the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 1 or more, the first random number table 202a2 for high probability, the stop type selection table for high probability, And each table of the special symbol jackpot type table is compared with the winning data acquired according to the starting winning. On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0, each table of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability, the stop type selection table for low probability, and the special symbol jackpot type table, and the start prize The winning data obtained according to the above is compared.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with the ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 8A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the ROM 202, the first per random number table 202a, the first per type selection table 202b, the second per random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and the special fluctuation pattern selection. At least a table 202e is provided.

As described above, the first random number table 202a is a table in which the value of a random number that is a big hit for a special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, in this first random number table 202a, a table for determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit at the time of low probability of the special symbol (first random number table 202a1 for low probability), and the high of the special symbol. A table (first random number table 202a2 for high probability time) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit at the time of probability is provided, and the number of random numbers to be a big hit included in each table is different. There is. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 8B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. .. As shown in FIG. 8B, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 16, the current big hit is “big hit A (3R big hit)”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 17 to 31, it is determined that the big hit this time is “big hit B (4R big hit)”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 32 to 94, the current big hit is determined as "big hit C (6R big hit)", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 95 to 99. If there is, the big hit this time is determined to be "big hit D (15R big hit)".

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(a)) is a data table in which hit determination values of normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 9(a), at a low probability of a normal symbol (during a normal state of a normal symbol), the value of the second per random number counter C3 stored in the second per random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is usually determined as a winning symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). , The electric accessory that accompanies the first ball inlet 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”.

On the other hand, when a high probability of a normal symbol (during a time saving state of a normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 is determined to be a normal symbol when the value is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). , The electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened “×1 second×2 times”.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the selection table for out-of-range 202d1 for selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, and the lottery result of the special symbol are hits. At least the hit selection table 202d2 for selecting the variation pattern in the case of occurrence is defined.

The special variation selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern in the special variation period (that is, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect). The special variation selection table 202e defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols. Specifically, the special selection table for misses 202d1 (see FIG. 10(a)) for selecting the variation pattern in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out, and the lottery result of the special symbol are the hits. The special selection table for hitting time 202e2 (see FIG. 10B) for selecting the variation pattern in the case of being defined is defined at least. The off-time special selection table 202e1 and the hit-time special selection table 202e2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10A is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the out-of-phase special selection table 202e1 prescribed in the special fluctuation selection table 202e, and FIG. 10B shows the prescribed contents of the hit special selection table 202e2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the special selection table for out-of-range 202e1 defines the number of times of special symbol lottery and the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation pattern selected in association with each other. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery performed the first time or the second time after the end of the big hit is missed, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 2 seconds regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. (Special variation A) is selected. If the special symbol lottery performed the third time or the fourth time after the end of the big hit is missed, the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery performed 5th to 8th after the end of the big hit is missed, the variation pattern having the variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. It

In other words, after the jackpot is over, if the special lottery for the 8th time is all missed, the change pattern production for the 8th time takes a total of 8 seconds (2 seconds×2+1 seconds×2+0.5 seconds×4). Execute. Furthermore, the end display of the pseudo interval effect is displayed within 2 seconds after the end of the eight times of variation pattern effects. Thereby, the production period of the pseudo-interval production performed after the jackpot can be fixed to 10 seconds. Therefore, the effect period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the big hit can be matched each time, so that it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. be able to. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The number of times the special symbol is drawn is determined based on the value of the special variation counter 203g. As described above, the special fluctuation counter 203g is set to 8 at the end timing of the big hit, and is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 8, it is determined that the special symbol lottery this time is the first lottery, because the special symbol lottery has not been performed even once after the jackpot. .. Further, for example, if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 3, it indicates that the special symbol lottery has been executed five times after the jackpot, so it is determined that the special symbol lottery this time is the sixth lottery. To do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, the special selection table for hitting time 202e2 is also defined in association with the lottery number of special symbols and the mode (fluctuation time) of the variation pattern to be selected. .. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery performed the first time after the end of the big hit is a win, the fluctuation pattern of which the fluctuation time is 8 seconds (special fluctuation D) regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. When the big hit is the second big hit, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation E) with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is selected, and when the big hit is the third big jackpot, the fluctuation time is 4 seconds. If the variation pattern (special variation F) is selected and the big hit is the fourth time after the big hit ends, the variation pattern (special variation G) having a variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Furthermore, when the big hit is the fifth big jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and when the big hit is the sixth big jackpot, the fluctuation time is 1. If the variation pattern of 5 seconds (special variation H) is selected and the big hit is the 7th time after the jackpot ends, the variation pattern of 1 second in variation time (special variation B) is selected and the 8th time after the jackpot ends. In the case of a big hit, a variation pattern (special variation C) having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected.

Each variation time defined in the special selection table for hitting time 202e is configured such that the period from the end of the previous big hit to the start of the next big hit is 8 seconds. For example, in the case where the jackpot is won in the third special symbol lottery after the jackpot is over, the variation time corresponding to the first and second special symbol lottery is changed from the out-of-time special selection table 202e1. A variation pattern of 2 seconds (special variation A) is selected. As the variation pattern corresponding to the third special symbol lottery, the variation pattern (special variation F) having a variation time of 4 seconds is selected from the hit special selection table 202e2. Therefore, the total variation time of three times is 8 seconds (2 seconds×2+4 seconds).

By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot ends with a special symbol lottery within 8 times after the jackpot is over, 8 seconds until the next jackpot and 2 seconds of the jackpot opening period (total A pseudo interval effect can be performed during 10 seconds). That is, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won in the special variation period, the same effect period can be used for the pseudo interval effect, so it is difficult to know whether or not the jackpot will continue as a result of the pseudo interval effect. You can Therefore, it is possible to make the player confirm the pseudo interval effect to the end while expecting the jackpot to continue after the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player for the pseudo interval effect.

In addition, even when the jackpot is a jackpot with a lottery number of special symbols within 8 times after the jackpot ends, the pseudo interval effect execution period and the interval effect execution period executed during the jackpot are the same period ( 10 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect, which makes it difficult for the player to know that the jackpot is over and how long the jackpot will last. be able to. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 29) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out one prize ball. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out every time the rotation amount of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216 in a predetermined time (10 seconds). In addition, each time a predetermined number (10) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). Accordingly, for example, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls such as a big hit, it is possible to prevent the payout motor 216 from continuously paying out the prize balls and to prevent the payout motor 216 from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing due to melting of the resin portion or the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to heat generation of the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the accessible portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion such as the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51 that the player touches), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. Can be suppressed. It should be noted that the number of payouts and the pause period of payout until the payout motor 216 stops payout of prize balls are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout motor 216 may be configured to suspend the payout each time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out. Further, for example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light and turns off from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation pattern ( This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error in accordance with the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

Here, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. As shown in FIG. 11A, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a and a special fluctuation pattern table 222b. The fluctuation pattern table 222a and the special fluctuation pattern table 222b are referred to in order to select a detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern effect based on the mode of the rough fluctuation pattern effect notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. Table. The variation pattern table 222a is referred to when selecting the aspect of the variation pattern effect performed after the ninth jackpot is finished and after the ninth time (that is, after the end of the pseudo interval effect). On the other hand, the special fluctuation pattern table 222b is referred to when selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern effect performed within eight times (that is, within the execution period of the pseudo interval effect) after the jackpot is finished. Note that, as described above, the variation pattern effect performed in the pseudo interval effect refers to, for example, a mode in which the main symbol is reduced and displayed in a variable manner so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, when a special symbol big hit occurs again after the pseudo interval effect, it is possible to make the player feel as if the special gaming state continues from the previous big hit. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 11B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d. Is provided at least.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From the, various information obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information notified by the prize information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special variation period ends, the winning information storage area 223a is referred to, and after the special variation period ends, the special symbol lottery is a big hit until it is executed four times. Is being determined. When it is determined that there is a big hit, the pseudo interval effect is extended until the big hit is started. This allows the player to predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the presentation time, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval can be improved.

The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 36). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. Therefore, the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to receiving the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number for the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 37), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 39). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 of FIG. 39). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop design according to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed in the third design display device 81, so that the stop display of the variation effect is displayed. Is controlled.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 29).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, a flow of the pseudo-interval effect executed in the big hit and the special variation period after the end of the big hit will be described. FIG. 12 is a pseudo interval effect executed after the "big hit D (15R big hit)" is finished, in the case of suggesting that the big hit has ended (that is, all 8 special symbol lottery results after the big hit are out. FIG.

The diagram on the upper side of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the transition of the effect executed before and after the jackpot and the transition of the state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in contrast. As shown in FIG. 12, when the symbol stopped and displayed after the symbol variation by the variation pattern effect is the symbol corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot is started. When the jackpot is started, an opening effect for 2 seconds is executed. In this opening effect, an effect of celebrating that a new jackpot is won is executed. For example, a boy normally displayed in the sub display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4(b)) is displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81, and congratulates the player with "Congratulations". It is an effect to be mentioned.

When this opening effect is completed, the first round effect is started. In each round of jackpots, the player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls (game value) than in the normal time, so in the round effect, an effect that suggests obtaining a prize ball (game value) is executed. For example, in a normal state, a boy displayed in the sub-display area Ds2 (see FIG. 4B) enters a treasure room filled with gold and silver treasures, obtains a large amount of treasure, and is overjoyed. Etc. In addition, when the first round is started, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won). It The player can obtain a larger amount of prize balls (game value) than in the normal case by winning the balls in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

After that, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (for example, 30 seconds has elapsed, or 10 balls are won), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed and the interval effect is produced. Is executed. Although details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, this interval effect continues for 10 seconds, and an effect of notifying whether or not the next round is started is performed depending on whether or not the door is opened. .. This door is, for example, the door of the next treasure room. Then, when the door opening effect is performed and the start of the next round is informed, the second round effect is started and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. Even in the second round, as in the first round, for example, a player enters the treasure room through the door and wins a large amount of treasure, which makes the player happy. The production that suggests is performed.

When the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (for example, 30 seconds has passed or 10 balls are won), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened as in the first round. At the same time as being closed, the interval effect is executed. This interval effect is an effect that informs whether or not the next round will be started depending on whether or not the door is opened as described above.

Even after the third round, the round effect and the interval effect are alternately executed in association with the opening/closing state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

The round effect does not necessarily have to be the same effect in each round. For example, in an even round, a boy performs a production (first round production) in the treasure room where a large amount of treasure is obtained, and in an odd round, a girl (not shown) relaxes at the resort beach (second round production). ) May be executed. Further, for example, the two types of effects may be randomly selected in each round. In addition, an effect that can be selected only in a round other than the final round of jackpot may be provided. For example, in the rounds other than the final round, the second round effect described above is configured to be selected with a lower probability than in the first round effect, and only the first round effect is selected in the final round of jackpot. It may be configured so that it can be performed. With such a configuration, by displaying the second round effect, it is possible to let the player recognize that one or more rounds of jackpots remain. That is, it is possible to recognize that only the second round effect is displayed, and the opportunity to obtain a large amount of prize balls is given at least one more time. Therefore, by executing the second round effect, Great satisfaction can be given to the player.

In addition, in the 15th round, which is the final round of "big hit D (15R big hit)", the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (for example, 30 seconds has passed or 10 balls are won) is established. , When the jackpot is over, the pseudo interval effect is executed. In this pseudo interval effect, the same effect as the interval effect described above (that is, the effect that the boy opens the door) is executed within 8 seconds after the effect is started. After that (that is, 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the pseudo interval effect), an effect that succeeds in opening the door or an effect that fails in opening the door is basically executed. Although details will be described later, in the case of executing a variation pattern effect of a special symbol during the pseudo interval effect, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, in a mode in which the main symbol is reduced (that is, the player). Performs the variation pattern effect (in a mode that is difficult to notice if the variation pattern effect is performed).

The control during the pseudo interval effect will be described in detail with reference to the lower diagram of FIG. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 12, the special fluctuation period is set after the jackpot is over. In the special fluctuation period, as described above, the mode of the fluctuation pattern effect is selected from the special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C). In the example of FIG. 12, the lottery for special symbols is all missed 8 times after the jackpot is over, so the mode of the variation pattern production of 8 times is all special selection table for out-of-coop 202e1 (see FIG. 10(a)). Selected from. That is, in the first and second variation pattern effects after the jackpot is finished, a variation pattern (special variation A) with a variation time of 2 seconds (design variation 1.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected. In the variation pattern effect that is performed for the third and fourth times after the jackpot is finished, a variation pattern (special variation B) having a variation time of 1 second (design variation 0.6 seconds + stop display 0.4 seconds) is selected. In the variation pattern effect that is performed 5th to 8th after the jackpot ends, the variation pattern (special variation C) with a variation time of 0.5 seconds (design variation 0.1 seconds + final display 0.4 seconds) is selected. It

That is, after the jackpot is finished, the variation pattern effect is performed 8 times in total for 8 seconds (2 seconds×2+1 seconds×2+0.5 seconds×4). As a result, the period (special variation period) in which the variation pattern effect is performed eight times after the jackpot is finished can be fixed to 8 seconds. Therefore, since the execution period of the pseudo interval effect and the execution period of the interval effect executed during the big hit can be matched each time, it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. be able to. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Moreover, after all the eight variation pattern effects have been completed, a two-second end effect for ending the pseudo interval effect is executed. Specifically, for the player that the above-mentioned production that fails to open the door is executed, the next round will not be started (that is, the previous round was the final round of the jackpot). Suggest. When this end effect is being executed, if the variation pattern effect is being executed in a reduced form in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, it is executed after the end effect is contracted. The variation pattern effect that has been used is returned to the normal display size. That is, returning to the mode illustrated in FIG. 4B, the variation pattern effect is executed. As described above, after the special variation period has elapsed (that is, the lottery for special symbols after the ninth jackpot is finished), the variation pattern effect is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202d. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202d defines a variation pattern presentation mode of 5 seconds to 30 seconds. Therefore, the variation pattern effect that is executed after the special variation period ends has a longer variation time than the end effect (2 seconds). In this case, if the variation pattern effect being executed is left in a reduced state despite the end effect has passed, most of the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where nothing is displayed. In some cases, the player may mistakenly recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem. Therefore, after the pseudo interval effect is finished, the display mode of the variation pattern effect is returned to the normal size, and the player is prevented from erroneously recognizing that the game machine has a problem.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a case in which the jackpot is again made after the pseudo interval effect will be described. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing a case where the jackpot is a big prize in the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot is finished, and FIG. 13(b) is a third special symbol after the jackpot is finished. It is the figure which showed the case where it becomes a big hit in the lottery, and FIG.13(c) is the figure which showed the case which becomes a big jackpot in the 12th special symbol lottery after the big hit ends.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the jackpot is over in the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, from the winning special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10(b)), the variation time A variation pattern effect of 8 seconds is selected. As a result, the period from the end of a big jackpot to the start of the next jackpot can be set to 8 seconds. In addition, a period (opening period) of 2 seconds is provided from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round. Therefore, the period from the end of the big jackpot until the start of the first round of the next big jackpot (the period of the pseudo interval effect) is made to coincide with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the case where the big prize is won in the third special symbol lottery after the big hit ends, the mode of the variation pattern effect executed in the first and second times is selected from the out-of-time special selection table 202e1. .. In addition, the mode of the variation pattern effect executed for the third time is selected from the special selection table for hitting time 202e2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13B, a variation pattern having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as the variation pattern effect executed for the first time and the second time after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot ends. Since a variation pattern effect with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected as the variation pattern effect executed for the third time after the start, the period from the end of the big jackpot to the start of the next big jackpot should be 8 seconds. You can Therefore, the period from the end of the big jackpot until the start of the first round of the next big jackpot (the period of the pseudo interval effect) is made to coincide with the execution period (10 seconds) of the interval effect executed during the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, during the big hit and during the pseudo interval, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the big hit to continue for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, if the lottery of the special symbol for the 8th time is all missed after the jackpot is over, and at the end of the special variation period, if it is determined by the look-ahead that it will be the 4th big jackpot after the end of the special variation period, All the variation pattern effects during the special variation period are selected from the off-time special selection table 202e1. As a result, in the first and second variation pattern effects after the jackpot, the variation pattern (special variation A) with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected, and the variation pattern is performed the third and fourth times after the jackpot ends. In the variation pattern presentation, a variation pattern (special variation B) having a variation time of 1 second is selected, and in the variation pattern presentation performed 5th to 8th after the end of the jackpot, a variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds (special variation). Variation C) is selected. That is, after the jackpot is finished, the variation pattern effect is performed 8 times in total for 8 seconds (2 seconds×2+1 seconds×2+0.5 seconds×4).

In addition, the mode of the variation pattern effect executed for the first time to the third time after the end of the special variation period is selected from the out-of-range selection table 202d1, and the variation pattern effect executed for the fourth time after the end of the special variation period. A mode is selected from the hit selection table 202d2. In this case, even after the special variation period ends, the pseudo interval effect is extended until the next big hit. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 controls so that the pseudo interval effect is continued for 12 variations pattern effects after the big hit ends. This allows the player to predict whether or not the jackpot will continue depending on the length of the presentation time, so that the player's interest in the game during the jackpot and during the pseudo interval can be improved. The interval effect period and the pseudo interval effect period are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily set, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

In the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in the character ROM 234. Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a low read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data while setting the data in one bank while using the other bank. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 word (1 word=2 bytes) instructions) is stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, all the control programs are not stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 40) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is stored in the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 in a variation effect in the case of being performed.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 40). Since it is desirable that these images are displayed immediately after the power is turned on, they are composed of simple display images having a smaller data amount than the image data normally displayed.

When the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b, the remaining video data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control apparatus 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control apparatus 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control apparatus 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol are displayed alternately and repeatedly at the same position as the "○" symbol during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", a "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after the variation production is stopped, and if "a special symbol is off", an "x" symbol is displayed after the variation production is stopped. Display for a certain period.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235, without worrying about whether the operation has stopped. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, a power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect by using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol, which is composed of an attached symbol imitating the above, is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the device 114 stores it in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading out the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and for example, a variable effect and a round effect. Display data tables corresponding to the interval effect, the pseudo interval effect, and the demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. , Jackpot C, or jackpot D, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The round effect is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The interval effect is an effect executed between the end of each big hit round and the start of the next round. As described above, the pseudo interval effect is an effect executed after the jackpot is over, and the same effect as the interval effect is executed. If the starting condition is satisfied during the pseudo interval effect, the variable effect is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the screen.

As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect was stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of round effect, interval effect, pseudo interval effect, and demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, what range of the back side type and the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time but may be the information indicating the address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Has the symbol type offset information as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, and the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 15) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) which should start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 16). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time specified by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data that means is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 16).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 16, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 17) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 16, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is used after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 40). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3705 in FIG. 51B).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 42B), and the simple image display flag 233c is displayed. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 42(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 42B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 42(b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 51A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and on the basis of the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) in which the instruction content of the image drawing for the is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 17) that describes the instruction content of the image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 42(b )), the pointer update processing (see S3305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (Refer to FIG. 17), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,... For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. In addition, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy that information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character The detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table, in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3307 of FIG. 48). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 52). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 52). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has been developed in advance from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 42B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 53).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20, an example of the pseudo interval effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the following description, a pseudo interval effect executed after the “big hit A (3R big hit)” is finished is described as an example. FIG. 18A is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed when the pseudo interval effect is started. As shown in FIG. 18A, a horizontally long rectangular area is provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of rounds consumed until the pseudo interval effect is started is displayed inside the area. Is configured to be. In this example, since the pseudo interval effect is executed after the big hit (big hit A) with three rounds, the character "ROUND3" is displayed in the rectangular area. In addition, a boy appears at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect of discovering the door displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the pseudo interval effect, an effect that a boy tries to open this door is executed.

Further, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, the variation pattern effect is reduced (that is, in a mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize). The difference between the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the pseudo interval effect and the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the interval effect executed during the big hit is the variation pattern effect. Is only displayed in a reduced size. That is, since the interval effect is performed during the big hit, there is no special symbol lottery and no variation pattern effect is executed, so that nothing is displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, the same display image is displayed in the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect, except that the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed, and the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed to the extent that it is difficult to visually recognize. .. This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect.

Note that the method of making it difficult to visually recognize the variation pattern effect is not limited to this. For example, during the pseudo interval effect, it may be difficult to visually recognize the variable pattern effect by displaying it in a semitransparent manner. Further, not only during the pseudo interval effect, but also during the big hit interval effect, the pseudo variation pattern effect may be reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the case of reducing the variable pattern effect in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, the reduced display portion may be always hidden by the electric accessory or the like. Further, the electric accessory may operate only during the big hit interval effect and during the pseudo interval effect, and the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 may be hidden. These can make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern effect is simply displayed in a reduced size in the lower right portion, but it may be configured to be displayed in a different mode. For example, during the pseudo-interval effect, the main symbol may be displayed by a symbol other than a number so that different modes may be realized. Thereby, even if the player notices that the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed during the special variation period, it is difficult to know whether the result of the variation pattern effect is a hit or a mistake. That is, until the result of the pseudo interval effect is confirmed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the jackpot is started again or not. Therefore, the result of the pseudo interval effect can be interestingly observed by the player.

Further, during the special variation period, the stop display period may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). As a result, even if the player notices that the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed during the special variation period, the result of the variation pattern effect becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the player is constantly in the special variation period. It is possible to make the user feel as if the design has been reduced and is still changing. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the result of the variation pattern effect executed during the special variation period is a hit or a miss. Therefore, until the result of the pseudo interval effect is confirmed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the jackpot is started again or not. Therefore, the result of the pseudo interval effect can be interestingly observed by the player.

On the other hand, it may be configured such that the period of the symbol variation is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the symbol is varying. This makes it possible to recognize that what is displayed in the lower right part is only a list of meaningless numbers, and whether the result of the fluctuation pattern production executed during the special fluctuation period is hit or miss. It can be confusing. Further, in the case of shortening the symbol variation period, the fake effect may be displayed during the stop display period. For example, the stop symbol may be displayed for only a moment, and the fake symbol variation may be executed for the remaining time. Further, the symbols may be made transparent during the stop display. With these, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the result of the variation pattern effect executed during the special variation period is a hit or a miss. , It can be difficult to understand if it is not a big hit. Therefore, the result of the pseudo interval effect can be interestingly observed by the player.

Returning to FIG. 18, the description will be continued. In the special variation period, if the special symbol is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the door that the boy was trying to open is opened in the pseudo interval effect, and "+1 ROUND" is displayed from the door. Is produced. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a new round of jackpots will be started, so that the player can be pleased. The effect of opening the door is executed during a period from the start of the next big hit to the start of the first round of the next big hit. It should be noted that, when the jackpot is again won through the pseudo interval effect, the number of rounds is displayed from the continuation of the last round of the jackpot that was finished last time. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 18B (when the jackpot is again the jackpot during the special variation period after the “jackpot A (3 round jackpot)” is finished), after the display of “+1 ROUND” appears, "4ROUND" is displayed. Thereafter, each time the number of rounds increases, the display of the area for displaying the number of rounds provided in the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81 also increases by one.

On the other hand, if the special symbol does not become a big hit in the special fluctuation period, in the special fluctuation end display period (see FIG. 12) after the end of the special fluctuation period, as shown in FIG. The door cannot be opened, and the production of crying is executed. Further, after the boy begins to cry, as shown in FIG. 19(b), a woman appears on the third symbol display device 81, and the character "Matane!" is displayed. It By displaying in this way, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot has ended. The effect during the special change period is the same as when the big hit occurs during the special change, and only the effect that is executed after the end of the special change period (that is, the effect that notifies the result of the pseudo interval effect) is the big hit. It is configured to be executed in different modes depending on whether or not With this configuration, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit during the special variation period, it is possible to share the effect for 8 seconds executed during the special variation period. Therefore, the character of the display control device 114 can be used. The capacity of the ROM 234 can be reduced.

In addition, in the case where the special symbol is not a big hit in the special variation period, and when it is determined by the look-ahead that the special symbol will be a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol within four times, the boy tears out in FIG. 19(a) After that, the effect shown in FIG. 20B is executed. That is, a rectangular area appears in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "Open the door by tapping the button!" are displayed. On the right side of the third symbol display device 81, an image of the hand pressing the frame button 22 is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the chance to continue the jackpot is left, and the player can participate in the effect by pressing the frame button 22.

The effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 20A) continues until the variation pattern effect that is a big hit is executed. Then, the effect of opening the door (see FIG. 18B) is executed for 2 seconds before the end of the variation pattern effect that is a big hit. Furthermore, in the period from the big hit until the start of the first round (opening period), as shown in FIG. 20(b), a woman appears and the characters "I did it" are displayed. A performance is performed. With this effect, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot continues.

It should be noted that the effects performed in the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect are not limited to the effect of opening the door, and suggest that the jackpot will continue (or that the jackpot will end once and become a new jackpot). The form of the effect may be arbitrarily determined as long as the effect to be performed and the effect suggesting that the jackpot is finished are provided. For example, suggesting that a teammate of justice executes an effect of fighting an enemy, and that the jackpot will continue due to the effect of winning the enemy (or the jackpot will end once and become a new jackpot). It may be configured to suggest that the jackpot will be ended by defeating.

The effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 does not necessarily have to be executed after the effect that the boy starts to cry. It may be configured such that another effect is executed after the effect that the boy begins to cry, and then an effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be pressed (see FIG. 20A) is executed. For example, a boy may perform an effect of discovering another door, and then perform an effect of prompting the frame button 22 to be pressed (see FIG. 20A). Further, in this case, the time until the next big hit is determined by prefetching, and the timing for starting the execution of the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the frame button 22 to be pressed is determined in advance. You may. As a result, the execution period of the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 can be set to the same period each time. Therefore, when the time until the big hit is long, the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 continues to be displayed for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of pressing the frame button. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect only for an appropriate period for executing the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the frame button 22.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the big hit is not made during the special change period, the form of the change pattern effects after the ninth big hit is selected from the change pattern selection table 202d. It is not limited to this. For example, in the ninth to twelfth special symbol lottery (that is, the remaining period of the high probability state of the special symbol after the special variation period ends), the mode of variation pattern production (variation time) from different data tables. It may be configured to be selected. For example, in the case where the ninth special symbol lottery result is missed, a variation pattern effect for 2 seconds may be selected without fail. As a result, in the case of notifying the end of the big hit as a result of the pseudo interval effect, 2 seconds which is the effect period of the notification effect of the end (see FIGS. 19A and 19B) and the ninth variation pattern effect. It is possible to match the fluctuation time of. That is, the end timing of the effect (see FIGS. 19A and 19B) for notifying the end of the big hit and the end timing of the ninth variation pattern effect can be matched. Therefore, until the 9th variation pattern effect, the variation pattern effect is reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, and in the 10th and later variation pattern effects, in a normal manner from the start time of the effect. Since it suffices to execute the variation pattern effect, it is not necessary to cancel the reduced display during the variation pattern effect. Therefore, the display control can be simplified.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special variation period ends, if there is a holding ball that is a big hit due to the look-ahead, the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the button is executed. , But not limited to this. For example, in the case of a big hit during the special fluctuation period, a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) is used to execute an effect (see FIG. 20(a)) that prompts the user to press the button using the opening period of the big hit. You may comprise. Specifically, at the start of the opening effect, the effect shown in FIG. 19(a) in which the boy begins to cry is executed, and then the effect (see FIG. 20(a)) that prompts the user to press the button is changed during the opening period. It may be configured to execute in the remaining time. In addition, in the case of a jackpot that executes an effect (see FIG. 20(a)) that prompts the user to press the button during the opening period, the opening period is set to be longer than 2 seconds (for example, 10 seconds), and the effect that prompts the button to be pressed is provided. (See FIG. 20A) may be displayed longer. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the jackpot is continued if the button is pressed, and thus the player's motivation to participate in the game can be further increased.

Further, even when there is no holding ball to be a big hit, the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the button may be executed with a certain probability (for example, 5%). With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot will continue only by the appearance of the effect (see FIG. 20A) that prompts the user to press the button. Can make you interested. Further, even when the result of the effect (see FIG. 20(a)) that prompts the user to press the button is off, the effect is finished at the end of any of the ninth to twelfth variation pattern effects. You may. In this case, in the case of a deviation, the effect may be easily ended in accordance with the end of the variation pattern effect of a small number of times. That is, the probability of being notified that the result of the effect that prompts the user to press the button (see FIG. 20(a)) at the end of the 9th variation pattern effect is set high is set high, and the 12th variation pattern effect is set. The probability of being informed that it is out may be set low in accordance with the end of. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the expectation that the jackpot will continue is higher as the effect (see FIG. 20A) for urging the button to be pressed continues for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to push the button while hoping that the effect of pushing the button (see FIG. 20A) continues for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding control processing of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 33. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and thereafter. A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 26.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, in the case of a special symbol big hit, whether it is a big hit A, a big hit B, a big hit C, or a big hit D depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined.

In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on, and in the case of the big hit C, The red LED and the blue LED are turned on, and when the jackpot D is reached, the red LED, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next variable display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S211, the display of the special symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is special when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit of the symbol (S212). Then, if the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S212: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S213), and the process proceeds to S220. Specifically, the setting performed in the process of S213 is to set an opening start command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. The opening start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the effect mode to be executed during the opening period of the jackpot, and is set including information indicating whether or not the jackpot is achieved during the special variation period. That is, in the process of S213, when the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (that is, when the special fluctuation period is present), the opening start command corresponding to the special fluctuation period jackpot is set, and the special fluctuation counter is set. When 203g is 0 (that is, when the present is not in the special fluctuation period), the opening start command corresponding to the normal jackpot is set. Based on this opening start command, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 makes the door open in the pseudo interval effect and makes it appear as if the jackpot state has continued from the previous jackpot (see FIG. 18(b)). , Or a normal opening effect (for example, an effect that celebrates winning the jackpot).

The opening start command set in the process of S213 is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening start command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines from the opening start command whether or not it is a jackpot of the special fluctuation period, and controls the display of the opening start command for display corresponding to the state of the jackpot. The data is transmitted to the device 114 (see S1619 in FIG. 36). The display control device 114 that has received the display opening start command displays a normal opening (not shown) or an opening for the special fluctuation period (see FIG. 19B) based on the display opening command (see FIG. 19B). (See S2420 in FIG. 43).

On the other hand, in the process of S212, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203e is larger than 0 (S214), and the probability variation counter 203e is determined. When it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S214: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S215), and the process proceeds to S216. On the other hand, if the value of the probability changing counter 203e is 0 (S214: No), the process of S215 is skipped and the process proceeds to S216.

In the subsequent processing of S216, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is larger than 0 (S216), and if it is determined that the value of the hour/hour middle counter 203f is greater than 0 (S216: Yes), The value of 203f is subtracted by 1 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218.

In the process of S218, it is determined whether or not the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (S218), and when it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (S218: Yes), the special fluctuation. The value of the middle counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0 (S218: No), the process of S219 is skipped and the process proceeds to S220.

In the process of S220 executed after the process of S213, S218, or S219, the lighting of the LED and the third symbol display device 81, which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S211, are performed. A stop command is set in order to synchronize the variable stop of (S220).

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the lottery result of the special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the first hit type counter C2, and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired. (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S302). The special variation counter 203g indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special variation state (that is, a state in which a variation pattern production mode is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e when executing the variation pattern production). It is a counter, and if the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special fluctuation state of the special symbol. If the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is 0, the pachinko machine 10 is It indicates a normal state (that is, a state in which when a variation pattern effect is executed, a variation pattern effect mode is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d).

When it is determined in the process of S302 that the special variation counter 203g is 0 (S302: No), the normal variation selection process is executed (S303). Here, the details of the normal variation selection process (S303) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the normal fluctuation selection process (S303). This normal fluctuation selection process is a process for determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern effect to be executed from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d.

In this normal variation selection process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result acquired in the process of S301 is a special jackpot (S401). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of the four types of special symbols (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), and what is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 16”, it is determined to be the big hit A (3R big hit), and if it is in the range of “17 to 31,” the big hit B. It is determined to be (4R jackpot), if it is in the range of "32 to 94", it is determined to be jackpot C (6R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "95 to 99", jackpot D (15R jackpot) (See FIG. 8B).

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S401: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. (S402). In the process of S402, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern of the big hit is determined based on the hit selection table 202d2 (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set and the third until the big symbol symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 9B).

For example, the variation patterns for disengagement are defined as "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection superreach", and "disconnection special reach". As for the variation pattern of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined. Variations for jackpot C and jackpot D Various "special reach" are defined as patterns.

In the processing of S401, if it is determined that the special symbol is out of place (S401: No), the display mode of out of position is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the stop type, “rear out of front/rear”, “reach other than out of front/rear”, “complete out”, etc. are defined.

Next, the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the deviation selection table 202d1 (S405). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S403, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is checked based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the time. When the process of S403 or the process of S405 ends, this process ends and returns to the special symbol variation start process.

Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When it is determined that the value of the special fluctuation counter 203g is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the special fluctuation selection process is executed (S304). Here, the details of the special variation selection process (S304) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special variation selection process (S304).

In this special variation selection process, like the normal variation selection process (S303), first, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S301 is determined whether it is a big hit of the special symbol (S501), and the special symbol When it is determined that it is a big hit (S501: Yes), the display mode of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S502). The specific content is the same as the setting (S402) of the display mode at the time of a big hit in the normal variation selection process (S303). It is not necessary to set the display mode of the big hit (S402), and for example, a table different from the first hit type selection table 202b used in the normal change selection process (S303) is prepared to change the big hit. The mode may be set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined based on the special selection table for hit time 202e2 (see FIG. 10B) (S503), and this processing is ended. As described above, the winning special selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 10(b)) is configured such that a fixed variation period variation pattern is selected according to the number of special symbols drawn. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery performed the first time after the end of the big hit is a win, a change pattern (special change D) having a change time of 8 seconds is selected. When the big hit is the second big hit, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation E) with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is selected, and when the big hit is the third big jackpot, the fluctuation time is 4 seconds. If the variation pattern (special variation F) is selected and the big hit is the fourth time after the big hit ends, the variation pattern (special variation G) having a variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Furthermore, when the big hit is the fifth big jackpot, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and when the big hit is the sixth big jackpot, the fluctuation time is 1. If the variation pattern of 5 seconds (special variation H) is selected and the big hit is the 7th time after the jackpot ends, the variation pattern of 1 second in variation time (special variation B) is selected and the 8th time after the jackpot ends. In the case of a big hit, a variation pattern (special variation C) having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. With such a configuration, the period from the end of the previous big hit to the start of the next big hit can be made constant irrespective of the lottery number of special symbols. Therefore, the effect period of the pseudo interval effect and the effect period of the interval effect executed during the big hit can be matched each time.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of position (S501: No), the display mode of out of position is set (S504). The specific content is the same as the setting (S404) of the display mode outside the normal variation selection processing (S303). Note that this does not have to be the same as the setting of the display mode of deviation (S404). For example, a table different from the table for determining the stop type used in the normal fluctuation selection process (S303) is prepared, and the fluctuation mode of deviation is set. May be set.

Next, the variation pattern of the deviation is determined based on the deviation special selection table 202e1 (FIG. 10A) (S505), and this processing ends. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. As described above, the special selection table for detachment 202e1 (see FIG. 10A) is configured such that the variation pattern of the fixed variation period is selected according to the number of times the special symbol is drawn. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery performed the first time or the second time after the jackpot is over is missed, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected. In addition, if the special symbol lottery performed the third time or the fourth time after the end of the big hit is missed, the fluctuation pattern having the fluctuation time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery performed 5th to 8th after the end of the big hit is missed, a variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected. With such a configuration, the period from the end of the previous jackpot to the end of the special fluctuation period can be made constant (8 seconds) regardless of the number of lottery for special symbols. Therefore, the effect period of the pseudo interval effect and the effect period of the interval effect executed during the big hit can be matched each time.

Returning to FIG. 23, the description will be continued. When the process of S303 or the process of S304 is finished, next, a change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S303 or the process of S304 is set (S305). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or the process of S304 is set (S306). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (FIG. 31). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S306 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting prize) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first winning slot 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (8 in this embodiment) (S603).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 8 If not (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is less than 8 (S603: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S605).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S605, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is acquired (S606), and the pre-reading probability changing counter stored in the RAM 203 is acquired. The value of 203h is confirmed (S607).

Here, when the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is larger than 0 (S607: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined by the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S606 and the high probability time. It is determined by comparing each of the 30 random number values (hit values) stored in the first per random number table 202a2 (not shown) (S608). As described above, as the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits are set. When the random numbers match with, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0 (S607: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406, and at the time of low probability. It is determined by comparing the random number values (winning values) of 3 stored in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown). As described above, three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random numbers that are these hits. When the two match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

After determining whether or not the special symbol is a big hit by the processing of S608 or S609, the big hit determination result determined in S608 or S609 and the first hit type counter C2 and the stop updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Each value of the type selection counter C3 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S610). In the process of S610, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is set (S611). The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the prize information command, it extracts the jackpot determination result from the prize information command and stores this information as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a, thereby determining the special variable extension display. Used for etc.

After setting the winning information command by the process of S611, it is determined whether the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S612). When the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S612: Yes), 12 is set in the prefetch probability changing counter 203h (S613), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination result determined in S608 or S609 is out of the special symbol (S612: No), it is determined whether the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is greater than 0 (S614), and the pre-reading probability changing is in progress. If the counter 203h is larger than 0 (S614: Yes), the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S615), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0 (S614: No), the process of S615 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S701). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is made while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the processing of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S708). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is greater than 0 (S708: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is normal. It indicates that the symbol is in the time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 0 (S708: No), it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S709). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is about to win the special winning opening 65a, from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9A).

In the process of S708, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9A).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S712), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S712: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is greater than 0 (S714), and when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is greater than 0 (S714: Yes), the present is now a special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the process of S715, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the first entrance opening The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S714, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds and the number of releases is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S712: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be illuminated and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S719, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is greater than 0 (S719), and if the value of the hour/hour medium counter 203f is greater than 0 (S719: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S719: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the ordinary symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S722). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S722, if the variation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for normal symbols is lost and the display mode is set by the processing in S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S723, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is performed when the second symbol display update process (see S1108) of the main process (see FIG. 31) is executed next. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S713 or the processing of S718, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this processing is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1106) of the main processing (see FIG. 31) is executed next. Is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 per 2 and holding it.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter The value (M) of 203d is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM203. In the area (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1115 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, a production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1101 to S1108 is executed as a periodic process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1111 and S1112 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. Further, the special lamp variation process (see FIG. 22) and the hold ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 26) and the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 26) are used as the voice lamp control device. Send to 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the number-of-rounds command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32), the inter-round effect start command, the special game effect end command, and the special variation end command set in the special variation control process (see FIG. 33) are voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. After closing the specific winning opening 65a in the final round, the jackpot end is set. The setting of the end of the jackpot includes the setting of the start of the special fluctuation period. On the other hand, when closing the specific winning opening 65a in a round other than the final round, an inter-round effect start command is set. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a special variation control process of notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the variation pattern effect (special variation) in the special variation period has ended is executed (S1105). In the special fluctuation control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the special fluctuation set after the end of the jackpot, and if it is the end timing of the special fluctuation, the special fluctuation end command is set. By setting this special fluctuation end command, the special fluctuation end display (FIG. 19A) or the special fluctuation extension display (FIG. 20(a) is triggered by the end of the special fluctuation executed last in the special fluctuation period. )) can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the special fluctuation control process (S1105) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1106). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric auditors is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1107). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), variation display according to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display device 37. To do. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, every time the main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device 37 executes it. The variation display that has been finished, the display pattern set by the normal variation selection process (S303) or the special variation selection process (S304) of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the stop symbol (first symbol) A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

Next, a second symbol display updating process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1108). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 27), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the variable display, and in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1110). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1110: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1110: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1111, S1112).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1111). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1112).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1108 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1109, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1109: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 29 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S1113 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1113), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1114). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1115), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1116), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1109 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1108 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1111 and S1112 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at the time of power-off, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1201). Specifically, the processing of S213 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, the jackpot of the special symbol is started. As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1201: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1202: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), this processing is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1205, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), It is determined whether or not the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a this time is for the final round (that is, whether or not all the rounds for jackpots have been completed) (S1207).

When it is determined that the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is for the final round (S1207: Yes), the end of the big hit is set (S1208), and the value corresponding to the various jacks after the big hit is set. It is set (S1209). That is, by setting 12 in the probability variation counter 203e, it is set to be in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is performed 12 times. In addition, by setting 8 in the time saving counter 203f, it is set to be in a high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed eight times. Further, by setting 8 in the special variation counter 203g, the special variation period is set from the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery is executed eight times. After setting the various counter values, this process ends.

When it is determined that the round in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed is not the final round (S1207: No), an inter-round effect start command is set (S1210), and this processing ends. This inter-round effect start command is a command for starting an interval effect (inter-round effect) that is executed within 10 seconds after the jackpot round is finished and before the next round is started.

The inter-round effect command set by the processing of S1210 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the inter-round effect command, it transmits the display inter-round effect command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the inter-round effect command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts the interval effect (inter-round effect).

Next, the special fluctuation control process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special variation control processing (S1105). This special variation control process (S1105) is executed in the main interruption process (see FIG. 31), and determines the end timing of the variation pattern effect (special variation) during the special variation period set after the end of the big hit. , A process for starting a special variation end display (FIG. 19A) or a special variation extension display (FIG. 20A), which is an effect at the end of the special variation period.

First, in the special fluctuation control process, it is determined whether it is the timing for ending the special fluctuation (S1301). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 selected in the special variation selection process (S304) has elapsed (S1301). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (according to the fluctuation pattern command), and the fluctuation time of this special fluctuation. If it has elapsed (S1301: Yes), a special variation end command is set (S1302), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time of the special variation has not elapsed (that is, it is not the special variation period or the end timing of the special variation in the special variation period) (S1301: No), the process of S1302 is skipped. , This process ends.

The special variation end command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special variation end command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the special variation period has ended, and when it determines that the special variation period has ended, the display special variation end command is displayed. Send to 114. When the display special fluctuation end command is received by the display control device 114, the special fluctuation end display (FIG. 19(a)) or the special fluctuation extension display (FIG. 3), which is the effect at the end of the special fluctuation, on the third symbol display device 81. 20(a)) is started. Here, the display special fluctuation end command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes a special fluctuation end display (FIG. 19A) or a special fluctuation extension display (FIG. 20A). It includes information indicating which to display.

In the present embodiment, in the special variation control process (S1105), the special variation end command is output every time the variation pattern effect (special variation) executed in the special variation period after the jackpot is finished is output. The special variation end command may be set only at the end timing of the variation pattern effect at the end of the variation period. Accordingly, the processing of outputting the special fluctuation end command at the end of the special fluctuation other than the special fluctuation that is executed last in the special fluctuation period can be omitted, and thus the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1401). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1516 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing. ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1513 of FIG. 35), the power-off process of S1516 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1516 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1402: No), the startup processing this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S1516 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1402: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1517, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1404, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S1515 in FIG. 35). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1516 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1408 with the power-off flag being turned on is that this start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1408 is reached in the state where the power-off flag is off is that the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process of S1404 to S1406 is performed and then S1408 is executed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1409, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S1409 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1404 when the processing of S1408 is reached through the processing of S1406 through S1406. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1501 was executed (S1501), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is mainly a process related to display (effect) in S1502 to S1510 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1511 and the variable display setting processing of S1512 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the power supply notifying process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1505.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the reserved quantity display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1507). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the rendering effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage change process is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the display control device 114 causes the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of the variation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1507 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1508), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1509, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1511. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1509 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1511, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variable display setting process, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1512 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1513). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1515), and the power-off process is executed (S1516). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1517), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1513 (S1513: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1514), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1514: No), the process returns to S1501 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1514: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the command determination processing (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 35) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1511), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area, analyzed, and the main control device 110 changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the display fluctuation pattern command setting process for extracting and setting the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern command is executed (S1602), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602).

In the display variation pattern command setting process (S1602), first, the variation start flag 223c of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1701). After that, a fluctuation pattern is acquired from the received command (S1702), and it is determined whether the acquired fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation (S1703). When it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is not a special fluctuation (S1703: No), the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the ROM 222 (S1704). On the other hand, when the acquired variation pattern is the special variation (S1703: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the special variation pattern table 222b of the ROM 222 (S1705). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 39) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). In the process of S1607, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1607 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the process of S1607 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, at the time of detecting the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1607 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1606, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1606: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1608). When the winning information command is received (S1608: Yes), the jackpot determination result in the special symbol is extracted as winning information from the received command and stored in the first area of the winning information storage area 223a (S1609), Return to processing. In the process of S1609, the value of the special symbol holding sphere counter 223b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each counter C1 is acquired by the main controller 110, and the acquired counter C1 and the pre-reading probability change. The special symbol big hit lottery is performed according to the value of the middle counter 203h, and the big hit determination result is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is greater than 0, a special symbol big hit lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, and when the pre-reading probability changing counter 203h is 0, a special symbol for low probability The jackpot lottery for special symbols is performed based on the jackpot random number table. Then, when the pre-reading is completed in the main control device 110, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the jackpot determination result of the special symbol obtained by the pre-reading is merely a prediction, and may be provided separately from the original jackpot lottery of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S1608, when the winning information command is not received (S1608: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1610). When the round number command is received (S1610: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1611), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( (S1612), the present process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1610, when the round number command is not received (S1610: No), it is then determined whether the inter-round effect start command is received from the main control device 110 (S1613). When the inter-round effect start command is received (S1613: Yes), the inter-round effect start command for display for displaying the interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81 is set ( (S1614), the present process ends. The inter-round display effect start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the inter-round display effect start command, the display control device 114 starts the interval effect (inter-round effect) in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1613, when the inter-round effect start command is not received (S1613: No), it is determined whether the special game effect end command is received (S1615). When the special game effect end command is received (S1615: Yes), the display special game effect end command for starting the pseudo interval effect is set on the third symbol display device 81 (S1616), and the book is set. The process ends. The display special game effect end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display special game effect end command, the display control device 114 starts the pseudo interval effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1615, when the special game effect end command is not received (S1615: No), it is determined whether the special variation end command is received (S1617). If it is determined that the special variation end command has been received (S1617: Yes), the display special variation end command setting process is executed (S1618), and this process ends.

Here, the display special variation end command setting process (S1618) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the display special variation end command setting process (S1618). The display special variation end command process is a process for setting a display special variation end command for causing the display control device 114 to execute the end effect of the pseudo interval effect based on the end of the special change period. is there.

In the display special variation end command setting process (S1618), first, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the special variation period (S1801). Specifically, whether it is the end timing of the special variation period is determined by whether or not the special variation has been performed a predetermined number of times (eight times in this embodiment). The number of executions of the special variation may be included in the special variation end command and received from the main control device 110, or may be determined by whether a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the end of the jackpot. It may be one that does.

In the processing of S1801, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the special fluctuation period (S1801: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the special variation period (S1801: Yes), the winning information of the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223 is acquired (S1802), and the jackpot is won. It is determined whether or not there is winning information to be shown (S1803).

In the processing of S1803, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating a big hit (S1803: Yes), the special variation extension display (FIG. 20(a)) is set as the display mode of the special variation end (S1804), The processing moves to S1806. The special variation extension display set here is based on the winning information acquired in the process of S1802, and the special variation extension display is terminated in accordance with a predetermined stop display which is a big hit. Specifically, when the winning information of the first, second and fourth areas is out and the winning information of the third area is a big hit, for example, the deviation time of the deviation is 10 seconds and the fluctuation time of the jackpot is 15 seconds. As described above, the variation time may be uniquely determined based on the jackpot determination result, and the special variation extension display may be ended 35 seconds after the predetermined stop display of the jackpot is displayed. The special variation extension display may continue to be displayed until the variation pattern command for displaying the predetermined stop display is received.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1803, when it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a big hit (S1803: No), the special variation end display (FIG. 19A) is set as the special variation end display mode (S1805). ), and proceeds to the processing of S1806. Note that the special variation end display is a fixed effect for 2 seconds, and as shown in FIG. 19A, after the effect that the boy cannot open the door and starts crying is executed, As shown in b), a female appears on the third symbol display device 81, and an effect of displaying the character "Matane!" is executed. By setting the special variation end display to 2 seconds, the period until the pseudo interval production is finished can be 10 seconds (special variation period 8 seconds + special variation end display 2 seconds). It can be combined with the production period of the interval production.

It should be noted that the special variation end display is not necessarily limited to the effect of 2 seconds, and based on the winning information acquired in the process of S1802, the fourth stop displayed lastly in the variation corresponding to the first to fourth areas. The special variation end display may be ended in accordance with the area stop display. Specifically, in the case where the winning information in the first to fourth areas is out, for example, the variation time of the deviation is 10 seconds, and the variation time is uniquely determined by the jackpot determination result. The special fluctuation end display may end 40 seconds after the stop display is finally displayed, or until the fluctuation pattern command for displaying the stop display at the end, that is, the fluctuation pattern command after four times is received. The special variation end display may be kept displayed.

In the process of S1806, the display mode of the special variation end set in the process of S1804 or the process of S1805 is set as a display special variation end command (S1806), and this process is terminated to execute the command determination process (see FIG. 36). ) Return to. The display special variation end command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and is stored in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display special variation end command, the display control device 114 starts the special variation end display (FIG. 19(a)) or the special variation extension display (FIG. 20(a)) on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. In the process of S1617, when the special variation end start command is not received (S1617: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1619), and returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be sent to. Specific examples of other commands include the above-mentioned opening start command. In the process of S1619, a command is issued to extract information on whether or not it is a big hit during the special fluctuation period from the opening start command, and to transmit the display opening start command corresponding to the extracted information to the display control device 114. Set.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1512). This fluctuation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then the display variation pattern command setting process of the command determination process (see FIG. 35). In (S1602), the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the process proceeds to S1910.

In the process of S1909, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910). , This process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 53. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 40, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided as in the conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs that are currently being transferred are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 40). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 40) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S2001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 41, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101 is not limited to this, but the boot program for executing the boot processing to be processed subsequent to the processing of S2102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. Alternatively, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The head address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 51A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command determination process is performed so that a simple power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B). (See S2308 of FIG. 42B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 of FIG. 42B) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to stand by until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main control device 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, a simple power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. .. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 17) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 42B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that a normal effect image is displayed instead of the simple power-on image. A command determination process (S2302) is executed to display the 3-symbol display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, the processing according to the command is executed, and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 or the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47.

In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the rear image after the change is sent to the image controller 237. The transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305). The drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. When the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (the big hit A, the big hit B, the big hit C, the big hit D, and other out-of-range indications) is displayed. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the simple power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2304. To do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 43, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table storage area. It is read from 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two fluctuation pattern commands for display are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may also be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in case of determining that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2503, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the above table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data is set by the process of S2504 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D, and other miss display) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601). , The stop type table and the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42(b)) is compared, and the fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop design after the effect is finally set (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S2603), the stop type command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 43).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 43, the description will be continued. In the process of S2406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If there is a display round number command (S2408: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2409), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp controller 114.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S2701). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2408, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes an inter-round display effect start command for display (S2410). ), if there is an inter-round display effect start command (S2410: Yes), an inter-round effect start command process is executed (S2411) and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the inter-round effect start command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the inter-round effect start command processing. The inter-round effect start command process is a process for displaying the interval effect (inter-round effect) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display inter-round effect start command received from the voice lamp control device 114. ..

In the inter-round effect start command processing, first, an inter-round display data table corresponding to the display mode of the interval effect (inter-round effect) indicated by the display inter-round effect start command is determined, and the determined inter-round display data table is determined. Is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2802). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each inter-round display data table corresponding to the display mode of each inter-round effect, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the inter-round display data table set by the processing of S2801 is turned on. At the same time, the data table determination flag corresponding to the other round display data table is set to OFF (S2803). In the display setting process, the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of any inter-round effect by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2803. You can easily determine if there is.

Next, based on the inter-round display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2804), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2805). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2806), the inter-round effect start command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that there is no inter-round display effect start command for display (S2410: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes a display special game effect end command. (S2412), if there is a display special game effect end command (S2412: Yes), the special game effect end command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the special game effect end command processing (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the special game effect end command processing. This special game effect end command process is a process for displaying the pseudo interval effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display special game effect end command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the special game effect end command processing, first, the special game effect end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation executed at the end of the special game effect indicated by the display special game effect end command is determined, and the determined special The game effect end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2902). Then, the special game effect end display data table set by the process of S2901 among the data table discrimination flags provided for each special game effect end data table corresponding to the display mode of the special variation executed at the end of each special game effect. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other special game effect end display data table is set off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2903, the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d becomes the display mode of which special game effect end effect. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it corresponds.

Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2905). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S2906), the special game effect end command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S2412, if it is determined that there is no display special game effect end command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the display special variation end command ( S2414), if there is a display special variation end command (S2414: Yes), the special variation end command process is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the special variation end command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the special variation end command processing. This special fluctuation end command processing displays a special fluctuation end display (FIG. 19A) or a special fluctuation extension display (FIG. 20A) corresponding to the display special fluctuation end command received from the voice lamp control device 114. This is a process for displaying at the end of the special variation.

In the special fluctuation end command processing, first, the special fluctuation end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the special fluctuation end display or the extended display, which is executed at the end of the special fluctuation indicated by the display special fluctuation end command, is determined, and the The determined special variation end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). Then, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3002). Then, of the data table determination flags provided for each special variation end data table corresponding to the display mode of each special variation end display or extension display, the special game effect end display data table set by the process of S3001 is set. The corresponding data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the other special game effect end display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S3003, the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d becomes the display mode of which special game effect end effect. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it corresponds.

Next, based on the special game effect end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3005). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3006), the special variation end command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2414, if it is determined that there is no display special variation end command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2416), If there is a back image change command (S2416: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). .. Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A to C), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3102), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the back image after the change is detected from the back image determination flag set by the process of S3102. Specify the image type. If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S3102 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the type of RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image classification indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract any one back image change command and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S2416, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2418), and there is an error command. If (S2418: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing (see FIG. 47B), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3201). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3202), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S3202 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, return to the description of FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2418 that there is no error command (S2418: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2420), and the process returns to S2201. Note that, as the processing (S2420) for other unprocessed commands, for example, there is processing when the above-described display opening start command is received. Specifically, in the process of S2420, when it is determined that the display opening start command has been received, if it is a jackpot of the normal fluctuation period, a normal opening mode (for example, a new jackpot is celebrated) Aspect) is used to display the opening effect, and processing is performed so that the opening effect is displayed in such a manner that the big hit is continued if it is a big hit during the special variation period (for example, an aspect shown in FIG. 19B). Is.

In the processing of S2201 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), and the processes of S2402 to S2420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2402 to S2420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying a simple image at power-on from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command. Only the command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 44A) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 44B), which are the processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed and other commands are executed. Performs a process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 44A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, details of the above-described display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3301), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S3302 to S3304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3302), and then S3303 to S3304. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S3303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

In S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer updating process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3503), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), and this processing is finished. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3506), this processing is ended and it returns to the display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3502: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 48, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S3306 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is larger than 0 (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process is returned to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3309).

As a result, if the finalization display flag is off (S3309: Yes), the finalization display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalization display. Therefore, the finalization display data table is first stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The contents are set (S3310), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol final display effect in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time elapses after the variation is started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S3315, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the confirmed display flag is OFF instead of ON (S3309: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is ON (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3317) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set to the.

In the process of S3316, if the demo display flag is turned on (S3316: No), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 42B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a simple power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time The display data table that defines the stop display of the image is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 51A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3702). In the process of S3702, after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3702 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to S3703. Also, as a result of the processing of S3701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the processing proceeds to S3703.

In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 42B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 of FIG. 42B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 of FIG. 42B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 43 to 47) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) (see S3601: No in FIG. 51A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a normal image transfer setting process (S3603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to step S3805.

Further, in the process of S3802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

In the process of S3806, after the image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3806 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3806: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Further, as a result of the process of S3805, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3805: No), the process proceeds to S3807.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S3808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3807: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3809). If the back image change flag is not on but on (S3809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S3813, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is ended as it is.

In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the processing of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image is changed. The image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, out of the image data used in step S1, can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d must be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

In the drawing process, types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 17 is generated (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2304). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the rearranged sprites are sorted in the detailed order for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 42B) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to perform the pseudo interval effect after the jackpot is over. This pseudo-interval effect is a special fluctuation period (until the jackpot is over, the fluctuation pattern effect is finished eight times, or after the jackpot is finished, the jackpot that is won by the lottery for special symbols is started eight times. The effect is the same as the interval effect executed during each round of the jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the time when the special symbol is drawn eight times after the jackpot is over, even when the jackpot is won at any of the first to eighth times. The period from the end of the jackpot to the start of the next round of the jackpot is 10 seconds. In this 10 seconds, the pseudo interval effect is executed, and it is suggested and displayed that the jackpot will continue. On the other hand, in the interval effect executed during the big hit, the effect period is fixed to 10 seconds, and the big hit continues within the 10 second effect, and it is suggested and displayed that the next round will start. That is, the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the big hit are configured such that the effect period and effect contents are the same. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the interval effect and the pseudo interval effect, and if the effect suggests that the jackpot will continue, the player may have won the jackpot with a large number of rounds, or the jackpot will end once. However, as a result of winning the jackpot again by the time the lottery for special symbols is performed eight times, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot is continuing for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid knowing how long the jackpot round will last, and it is possible to allow the player to play the game while having an expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game during the big hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, pre-reading is performed at the end of the special variation period, and it is determined whether or not there is a lottery result that is a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol four times from the end of the special variation. ing. Then, when it is determined that the lottery result for the jackpot is on hold, the pseudo interval effect is extended to the jackpot. As a result, even if an effect that suggests the end of the jackpot is displayed in the pseudo interval effect (that is, an effect in which a boy begins to cry as shown in FIG. 19A), the pseudo interval period is extended to the player. You can expect that. Therefore, the interest of the player in playing can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the special variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 9C) is configured so that the special variation period is always 8 seconds, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, if the special fluctuation period is 10 seconds and a big hit occurs during the special fluctuation, the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the first round of the next big hit is 10 by omitting the opening period. It may be set to seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to match the execution period of the interval effect with the execution period of the pseudo interval effect, the variation pattern effect of the variation time determined according to the value of the special variation counter 203g is executed. However, the control method for matching the execution period of the pseudo interval effect with the execution period of the interval effect is not limited to this. For example, when a timer capable of measuring the time elapsed after the jackpot is finished and the mode of the variation pattern effect is selected, the variation period may be set based on the elapsed time. Specifically, for example, when the mode of the variation pattern is selected while the special variation period remains 5 seconds, the variation time is 5 seconds or less (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds), or the variation of 5 seconds. It may be configured to select one of the times.

Further, the period of the interval effect and the period of the pseudo interval effect are not limited to 10 seconds, and can be arbitrarily set, for example, 5 seconds or 15 seconds. Also, the interval effect period during the big hit may be randomly set every time. Thereby, since it is not necessary to set the effect period of the pseudo interval effect to a fixed period, the table for selecting the variation pattern effect during the special variation period can be made common to, for example, the normal time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the special variation period ends (8 seconds from the end of the jackpot) and the timing at which the variation of the special symbol ends are matched, but it is not always necessary to match the timing. For example, the special variation period may be set as a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), and the variation pattern effect may be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d regardless of the fixed period (for example, 8 seconds). That is, the special variation period may be ended when a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds) elapses even during the production of the variation pattern. With this configuration, the data table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern effect can be made common to that in the normal time, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. In addition, by setting the special variation period to a fixed period (for example, 8 seconds), it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the big hit interval effect and the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible to know how long the jackpot will continue, and it is possible to make the player have an expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time. In this case, the special symbol lottery result is a big hit during the special change period, and the production period of the variation pattern effect for notifying the big hit is longer than the special change period until the big win is reached. The pseudo interval effect may be extended. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot has ended, so that the player can feel as if the jackpot has continued for a long time. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big hit does not occur in the special variation period, the variation pattern effect mode is selected from the out-of-time special selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 10A), and the special variation period is selected. In the case of a big hit, the mode of variation pattern production is selected from the special selection table for hitting time 202e2 (see FIG. 10B), but the mode of variation pattern is selected from the common table. It may be configured to. For example, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, the variation pattern effect mode may be selected from the out-of-time special selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 10A). With this configuration, the special selection table for hitting time 202e2 can be omitted, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. In addition, the special selection table for detachment 202e1 is configured such that the larger the number of times the special symbols are drawn, the shorter the fluctuation period is selected for the fluctuation pattern effect. As a result, a relatively long variation pattern effect is executed in the first 4 seconds of the special variation period, so the special symbol lottery is performed only twice, whereas a relatively short variation is performed in the latter 4 seconds. Since the pattern effect is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed six times. That is, since the number of times of special symbol lottery is greater in the latter half of the special variation period, when a big hit occurs during the special variation period, it is more likely to be a big hit in the latter half of the special variation period. Therefore, in the special fluctuation period, even if the mode of the fluctuation pattern effect is selected from the special selection table for out of place 202e1 (see FIG. 10(a)) without depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, during the special fluctuation period, If so, it is possible to increase the possibility of hitting in the latter half of the special fluctuation period. Therefore, even if there is a win, it is possible to make it difficult to understand from the length of the special variation period whether or not it is a pseudo interval effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the look-ahead performed at the end of the special variation period, if it is a big hit before the lottery of the special symbols is performed four times, the pseudo interval effect is configured to be extended, The pseudo interval effect may be extended with a predetermined probability even when there is no holding ball that becomes a jackpot at the end of the special variation period. As a result, it is not determined that the pseudo interval effect will be a big hit after the end of the pseudo interval effect, so that the player can see the result of the extended pseudo interval effect until the end.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. In the above-described first embodiment, the variable pattern effect of the fixed variable period is selected for each special symbol lottery number in the special variable period. Thereby, the special variation period is configured to end in 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot regardless of whether or not the special variation period is a big hit. In other words, in the first embodiment, it was premised that the variation pattern effect was executed without intervals.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, even if the predetermined variation period (8 seconds) elapses even during the special variation period, the main control device 110 causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the pseudo interval effect. It is configured to notify that it is the end timing of. That is, even in the special variation period, even if the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of retained balls is zero (no variation), the execution period of the pseudo interval effect can be matched with the interval effect. Is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely because the variation pattern effect is not executed eight times.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special fluctuation period, in the non-fluctuation state, and when it is detected that the player has stopped the game, the predetermined time (8 seconds) has not elapsed. Even so, the main control unit 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control unit 113 of the end of the pseudo interval effect. This allows the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first ball entrance 64 before the special variation period ends. Therefore, for example, for the reason of concentrating on the effect of whether or not the jackpot is continued, it is possible to cause the player who has stopped the game to launch a game ball, so that the game is stopped. The condition can be shortened.

Further, if the jackpot is continued for a long time, the player may be lost unless the game during the jackpot is continued without taking a break. After a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. This is because the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed even if the player does not have the chance to win the prize ball. In the present embodiment, it is possible to know earlier that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the player hits the ball, so that the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with a sharpness.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration. In the main control unit 110, the configuration of the RAM 203 is changed, and a timer executed by the MPU 201. Part of the process included in the interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and part of the process included in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 is It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, the other processes executed by the main controller 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 54, the RAM 203 built in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 54, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a clock counter 203j, a stop period counter 203k, and a special variation flag 203l in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. ..

The clock counter 203j is a down counter used to determine whether or not 8 seconds have passed since the jackpot was over. In the big hit control process 2, a counter value corresponding to 8 seconds is set to the clock counter 203j at the end of the big hit (see S1221 in FIG. 59), and the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment is executed. Each time it is performed, it is decremented by 1 in the special variation control process 2 (see S1311 in FIG. 60).

The stop period counter 203k is a down counter that determines the length of the period during which the player has stopped playing the game during the special fluctuation period that is set after the jackpot is over. Based on the value of the stop period counter 203k, it is determined whether or not to end the pseudo interval effect earlier than usual. The stop period counter 203k is set with a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds at the end of the big hit in the big hit control process 2 (see S1221 in FIG. 59). Also, in the special variation period, when the player's operation of the handle 51 is detected (that is, when the touch sensor 51a is determined to be turned on), the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is reset. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not changing during the special fluctuation period, the holding ball is in the state of 0, and the player does not operate the handle 51, the timer allocation in the second embodiment is performed. Each time the plug-in process (see FIG. 55) is executed, it is decremented by 1 in the period shortening process (see S4004 in FIG. 57).

The special variation flag 203l is a flag indicating whether or not the special variation period is in progress. When the state is on, it indicates that the special variation period is in progress, and when it is off, it is in a normal state (that is, the special variation period). After the end of the variable period). The special fluctuation flag 203l is set to ON at the end of the big hit (see S1222 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, when the special fluctuation end command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 is set, the special fluctuation flag 203l is set to OFF (see S4007 in FIG. 57 and S1313 in FIG. 60). Further, in the case of winning the special symbol jackpot, it is set to OFF before the jackpot is started (see S232 in FIG. 56).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 54 to 60. First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, each process of S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 is the same as each process of S101 to S103 and S105 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment. The process of is executed. Then, in the timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, a special symbol variation process 2 (S111) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process 2 (S111). This special symbol variation process 2 (S111), similarly to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed on the display device 81.

In each of S201 to S220 of the special symbol variation process 2 (S111), the same process as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is executed.
Then, in the special symbol variation process 2 in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the value (N) of the special symbol holding counter 203c is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), then the period shortening process Is executed (S231), and this processing ends. The period shortening process (S231) is a process for shortening and ending the pseudo interval effect according to the operation status of the handle 51 during the special variation period.

Further, in the special symbol variation process 2 in the second embodiment, when the big hit start is set by the process of S213, then the special variation flag 203l is set to OFF (S232), and the process proceeds to S220. By temporarily turning off the special variation flag 203l before the big hit is started, it is possible to prevent the production and control during the special change period from being erroneously executed during the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the period shortening process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this period shortening process. As described above, the period shortening process is a process for shortening and ending the pseudo interval effect according to the operation state of the handle 51 during the special variation period.

In the period shortening process, first, it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 203j is greater than 0 to determine whether it is within 8 seconds from the end of the jackpot (S4001). When it is determined that the value of the clock counter 203j is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S4001: No), it is after the sound lamp control device 113 is already notified of the end of the pseudo interval effect. This means that this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the value of the clock counter 203j is larger than 0, then it is determined whether or not the player is operating the handle 51 based on the detection result of the touch sensor 51a ( S4002). In the processing of S4002, when it is determined that the player is operating the handle 51 (S4002: Yes), the value of the stop period counter 203k is set to a value corresponding to 2 seconds (S4003), and the present processing To finish. The stop period counter 203k is decremented by 1 every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000 ms) is 1000.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4002, when it is determined that the player is not operating the handle 51 (S4002: No), the value of the stop period counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S4004), and the stop period counter 203k after the subtraction is executed. It is determined whether the value is 0 (S4005). Then, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203k is not 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S4005: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter is 0 (S4005: Yes), the player has not operated the handle 51 for 2 seconds (that is, the player has Since it means that the ball has not been hit for 2 seconds), a special variation end command is set (S4006) and the special variation flag 203l is set to OFF (S4007) in order to shorten and end the pseudo interval effect. ), and this processing ends.

Before the special variation period ends, the player recognizes that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first entrance 64 by shortening and ending the pseudo interval effect. Can be made. Therefore, for example, for the reason of concentrating on the effect of whether or not the jackpot is continued, it is possible to cause the player who has stopped the game to launch a game ball, so that the game is stopped. The condition can be shortened.

Further, if the jackpot is continued for a long time, the player may be lost unless the game during the jackpot is continued without taking a break. After a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. This is because the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed even if the player does not have the chance to win the prize ball. In the present embodiment, it is possible to know earlier that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the player hits the ball, so that the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with a sharpness.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As described above, this main process is a process of executing the main control of the game in a 4 ms cycle.

Of the main processing (see FIG. 58), in each of S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116, each of S1101 to S1103 and S1106 to S1116 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) according to the first embodiment. The same process as the process is executed. Then, in the main process of the second embodiment, the big hit control process 2 (S1121) is executed instead of the big hit control process (S1104) of the first embodiment, and further, instead of the special variation control process (S1105). Special variation control processing 2 (S1122) is executed. Details of these processes will be described with reference to the subsequent FIGS. 59 and 60.

First, the jackpot control process 2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 2. In this jackpot control process 2, similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the opening/closing of the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a during the jackpot is set, or a new round is started. This is a process of setting a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the jackpot control processes 2, S1201 to S1210, the same process as each of the S1201 to S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the big hit control process 2 in the second embodiment, the end of the big hit is set (S1208), and 12, 8, and 8 are set to the probability variation counter 203e, the time saving medium counter 203f, and the special variation counter 203g, respectively ( (S1209), then, the counter value corresponding to 8 seconds is set to the clock counter 203j, and the counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the stop period counter 203k (S1221). Here, since the clock counter 203j is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 58) (that is, every 4 ms), the counter value corresponding to 8 seconds (that is, 8000 ms) is 2000. .. In addition, as described above, the stop period counter 203k is a counter that is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55) executed every 2 ms, so that the counter corresponding to 2 seconds (that is, 2000 ms). The value is 1000. When the setting of each counter is completed by the processing of S1221, the special variation flag is set to ON (S1222) and this processing is terminated.

Next, the special fluctuation control process 2 (S1122) executed in the main process (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special variation control process 2. The special fluctuation control process 2 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the pseudo interval effect based on the value of the clock counter 203j, and if it is the end timing, the special fluctuation end command for ending the pseudo interval effect. Is a process for setting.

In the special fluctuation control process 2, first, it is determined whether the special fluctuation flag 203l is on () (S1311), and if the special fluctuation flag 203l is off (S1311), Since it means that the end of the pseudo interval effect has been set, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S1311, if it is determined that the special variation flag 203l is on (S1311: Yes), then the value of the clock counter 203j is decremented by 1 (S1312).

When the process of S1312 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 203j after subtraction is 0 (S1313), and when it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1313: No). ), it means that the timing for setting the end of the pseudo interval effect has not been reached (that is, within 8 seconds from the end of the big hit), so this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the clock counter b203j is 0 (S1313: Yes), it means that it is the timing to set the end of the pseudo interval effect (that is, 8 seconds have elapsed from the end of the jackpot). Therefore, the special fluctuation end command is set (S1302), the special fluctuation flag 203l is set to OFF (S1314), and this processing is ended. In this way, when the special variation end command is set when 8 seconds have passed from the end of the jackpot, the starting condition is not satisfied during the special variation period, and the number of reserved balls is zero. Even if the state (the state of no change) is reached, the execution period of the pseudo interval effect can be matched with the interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely because the variation pattern effect is not executed eight times. The special variation end command set by the process of S1302 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed by the MPU 201 is executed. Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special fluctuation end command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display special fluctuation end command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display special variation end command, an effect for ending the pseudo interval effect is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured so that the time counter 203j can count the elapsed time from the end of the big hit. Here, if the variation pattern effect is executed without any interval during the special variation, the special variation period can be ended 8 seconds after the jackpot is finished, and the pseudo interval effect can be terminated. If the condition is not satisfied and the number of retained balls is zero (no change), the condition for ending the special fluctuation period is not satisfied, and the pseudo interval effect may continue forever. It was

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the predetermined time (8 seconds) is determined by the count value of the clock counter 203j even during the special variation period, the pseudo interval effect is ended. It is configured to set. With this configuration, even if the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of retained balls is zero (non-variable state) during the special fluctuation period, the end of the pseudo interval effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the end condition of the special variation period from being satisfied and the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the special fluctuation period, in the non-fluctuation state, and when it is detected that the player has stopped the game, the predetermined time (8 seconds) has not elapsed. Even so, the main control unit 110 is configured to notify the voice lamp control unit 113 of the end of the pseudo interval effect. As a result, it is possible to let the player recognize that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the ball next wins the first ball entrance 64 before the special variation period ends. Therefore, for example, for the reason of concentrating on the effect of whether or not the jackpot is continued, it is possible to cause the player who has stopped the game to launch a game ball, so that the game is stopped. The condition can be shortened.

Further, if the jackpot is continued for a long time, the player may be lost unless the game during the jackpot is continued without taking a break. After a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. This is because the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed even if the player does not have the chance to win the prize ball. In the present embodiment, it is possible to know earlier that there is no possibility of a big hit unless the player hits the ball, so that the player can easily take a break. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with a sharpness.

In the present embodiment, the elapsed time after the jackpot is finished is configured to be counted by the clock counter 203j provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter unit is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the elapsed time is measured by the voice lamp control device 113, and when it is determined that a predetermined period (8 seconds) has passed, a pseudo interval effect is produced. May be configured to end. As a result, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that it is possible to reliably execute a process having a high degree of importance in the game, such as a process for executing a lottery for special symbols. Further, in this case, the variation pattern effect in the special variation period may be selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d as in the normal time. Further, when a variation pattern command indicating a big hit is output from the main control device 110 before a predetermined period has elapsed, the voice lamp control device 113 causes the pseudo interval effect at least until the variation pattern effect of the big hit ends. May be extended. As a result, the special variation pattern selection table 202e can be omitted, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, in the special variation period, when the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of retained balls is zero (no variation), the end display of the pseudo interval effect is set. However, it is also possible to display effects having completely different systems. For example, an effect may be executed that encourages the player to take a break. Further, for example, a display prompting the player to operate the handle 51 may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before the pseudo interval effect is shortened and ended. The display prompting the operation is, for example, a display that suggests that the pseudo interval effect will be ended if the operation is not performed. As a result, when the player has stopped the operation because he wants to thoroughly enjoy the effect, he can confirm the effect until the end by restarting the operation. In addition, if the player continues playing without taking a break due to a long succession of the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect, etc., the effect is interrupted and the player can recognize that it is time to take a break. You can

In the present embodiment, the pseudo interval effect is configured to be terminated when the starting condition is not satisfied and the number of retained balls is zero (state of no change) for 2 seconds during the special variation period. However, the condition for ending the effect is not limited to this, and may be a period longer than 2 seconds or a short period. In addition, if the jackpot is pre-read at the end of the jackpot and there are no lottery results for jackpots (or if the number of held balls is 0), the end display at the end of the jackpot (or a break for the player) May be configured to perform an effect such as an effect of prompting the user. With such a configuration, the jackpot round is completed, and the player can take a good break at the timing when a paragraph is set.

Also, when the start condition is not satisfied during the special fluctuation period or at the end of the jackpot, and the number of holding balls is zero (no fluctuation), the end display (or to the player It may be configured so that the player can select whether or not to perform an effect such as an effect of prompting a break. For example, when a predetermined operation such as operating the frame button 22 during a big hit is performed, it may be possible to perform an effect or the like that prompts the player to take a break. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player who has just taken a sufficient break from displaying an effect or the like that prompts the player to take a break again at short time intervals, and to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

In the present embodiment, the end of the pseudo interval effect is set when a maximum of 8 seconds elapses after the jackpot is finished, but even if the pseudo interval effect is ended, a predetermined number of times (8 times). Until the variation pattern effect is executed, the mode (variation time) of the variation pattern effect is selected from the special variation pattern selection table 202e. In this case, it may be configured to execute an effect different from normal time until the variation pattern effect of 8 times (or 12 times when the high probability state of the special symbol ends) ends. As an effect different from the normal time, for example, there is an effect of searching for a door different from the door that could not be opened in the pseudo interval effect. Further, while the effect different from the normal time is being executed, the variable pattern effect may be reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 as in the pseudo interval effect. Good. With such a configuration, it is shorter than a normal time such as 1 second or 0.5 second (that is, a state in which a variation pattern effect of a variation time of 5 seconds to 30 seconds is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202d). It is possible to prevent the variation pattern effect from being continuously executed by the entire third symbol display device 81, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Further, it is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot has ended once, but there is an expectation that the jackpot will be another jackpot (that is, the special symbol is in a high probability state).

In the present embodiment, the clock counter 203j is configured to be updated in the special fluctuation control process 2 (S1122) of the main process (see FIG. 58) executed every 4 ms, but it is executed every 2 ms. The timer interrupt process (see FIG. 55) may be performed. As a result, the clock counter 203j can be updated in a finer time width.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value of the stop period counter 203k is configured to be updated in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 55), but is configured to be performed in the main processing (see FIG. 58). You may. The value of the stop period counter 203k is used to determine whether or not to end the pseudo-interval effect in a shortened manner. This is because the production will only continue and no disadvantage will occur.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 71. In the above-described first embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. As a result, in each jackpot round, the player hits the ball to win the ball at the specific winning opening 65a, so that the ball is likely to enter the first winning opening 64 during the jackpot. This makes it possible to easily increase the number of holding balls during the big hit, so that the situation where the number of holding balls does not exist and the fluctuation does not occur during the special change period set after the end of the big hit is hard to occur. That is, the end condition of the special variation period is not satisfied, and the pseudo interval effect is unlikely to continue forever.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, two types of entrances (first entrance 64 and second entrance 640) are provided, and one entrance (second entrance 640) is provided. Is provided right above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Further, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is configured to be easily opened during the big hit. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball hit by the player during the jackpot to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of reserved balls does not exist in the special variation period set after the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for a situation in which no fluctuation occurs.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that, in the game board 13, a second ball entrance 640 and an electric motor attached to the second ball entrance 640. The accessory 640a is provided, in the main controller 110, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 are partially changed, the state setting table 202f is newly added, and the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a1, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203a2, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c1, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203c2, and the state transition counter 203m are provided, and A part of the processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 31) is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, the other processes executed by the main controller 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted. In the following, the special symbol lottery performed based on entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as a special symbol 1 (special map 1) lottery (special map 1), and the second entrance The lottery for special symbols performed based on entering 640 is referred to as the lottery for special symbols 2 (special diagram 2).

First, with reference to FIG. 61, the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, in the game board 13 of the third embodiment, a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the lower right portion in front view. And the 2nd entrance 640 is provided right above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640, and by hitting a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a rotates about a direction perpendicular to the game board 13. , It becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the second winning opening 640 is provided right above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, during the big hit, the specific winning opening (large opening) ) A ball shot aiming at 65a easily enters the second entrance 640. Further, since the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened during the big hit, the number of reserved balls is likely to be maximum (4) at the end of the big hit.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. FIG. 62A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62A, in the ROM 202 of this embodiment, a state setting table 202f is defined in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment. This state setting table 202f is a data table that is referred to for setting the state after the end of the big hit. Although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that settings such as after the jackpot finish are different depending on the jackpot type. In the state setting table 202f, set values are defined in association with the states to be set.

Also, FIG. 62B is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62(b), in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, instead of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment, a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a1, and The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2 is provided. Each of these has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area).

In the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a1, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired at the timing when the sphere wins the first slot 64. , Is an area where each value is stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a2, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second entrance 640. This is an area in which each value is stored.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, in place of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2. Is provided. The special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (variable display performed on the display device 81) up to 4 times, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (starting). The maximum number of holding balls (waiting count) of the variable display (variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning is up to 4 times. It is a counter for counting.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a state transition counter 203m instead of the time saving medium counter 203f provided in the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. This state transition counter 203m is a counter that indicates whether or not in a low probability state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the state transition counter 203m is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal symbol. Indicates that there is. On the other hand, if the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of a normal symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and when a part of the big hit (big hit E) is reached, a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit. (100 times) is configured so that a low probability state of a normal symbol is set. The state transition counter 203m is used to count whether or not this predetermined number of times has elapsed.

Next, the first hit type selection table 202b of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, "big hit E" is added, which does not shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the normal symbol (time saving state). As shown in FIG. 63, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 8" is "big hit A". Further, when the value is “9 to 16”, the jackpot type is “big hit B”, and when the value is “17 to 47”, the jackpot type is “big hit C” and the value is “48”. , 49”, the jackpot type is “jackpot D”, and the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot E”. That is, in the case of a big jackpot, half of the jackpots are “big jackpot E”.

As mentioned above, when it becomes "big hit E", it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, and it shifts to the normal state of the normal symbol, so the probability of becoming a big hit again at short intervals after the big hit ends. Is low. That is, it is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous to the player than other jackpot types. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls is easily maximized during the big hit by setting the high probability state of the normal big hit. Also, in the game rules, the state of the normal symbol in the so-called normal state (the state that shifts when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by pressing the RAM erasing switch 122) and the state of the normal symbol during the big hit match. Since it is stipulated that it is necessary to stay, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a high probability state of a normal symbol even in the normal state. Therefore, if you do not provide a "big hit E" that transitions to a low probability state of a normal symbol after the end of a big hit, you will always have a high probability state of a normal symbol during the game, giving an unexpected disadvantage to the hole. There is a risk that it will end up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the “big hit E” that shifts to the low probability state of the normal symbol after the big hit ends is provided, it is possible to prevent the hole from being given an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a state setting table 202f defined in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 64(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in this state setting table 202f.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), when the normal state is set as the state of the pachinko machine 10 or when the jackpot is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set together with the low probability state of the special symbol. Is set. Here, the case of setting the normal state, for example, when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed, or after the low probability state of the normal symbol is set a predetermined number of times after the jackpot is finished, the special state is set. This is the case when the number of times of drawing lots of symbols has reached a predetermined number. Also, at the start of the big hit, the special symbol is set to the low probability state, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the number of holding balls is easily maximized during the big hit.

After the jackpots A to D, the high probability state of the special symbol is set and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. The high probability state of the special symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 12 times, and then the low probability state of the special symbol is set. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, since it is a high probability state of the normal symbol, the state of the normal symbol is set to the same state as the normal state after the end of the big hits A to D. That is, the state of the normal pattern becomes the same as the big hit. Therefore, even if paying attention to the state of the normal symbol, there is no change between the big hit and after the big hits A to D, so it is possible to distinguish between the big hit interval effect and the big hit end pseudo interval effect. Can be more difficult. In addition, the high probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbols after the jackpots A to D are continued at least until the next jackpot.

On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot E, the low probability state of the special symbol is set and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. The low probability state of the special symbol continues at least until the next big hit. In addition, the low probability state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol is drawn 100 times. After the special symbol lottery has been performed 100 times, the normal state is set. That is, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64(b), a game flow of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64(b), in the present embodiment, the three types of states are configured to move back and forth. Specifically, there are a normal state, a probability variation state, and a low probability state. As described above, the normal state is a state in which the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on. The probability variation state is a high-probability state of a special symbol, and is a state that is set when one of the jackpots A to D ends. Furthermore, the low-probability state refers to a low-probability state of a special symbol, and a low-probability state of a normal symbol, and is a state set when the jackpot E ends.

In addition, the letters "right-handed navigation" or "left-handed navigation" written in parentheses on the right side of each state name indicate the direction in which the player is to indicate the direction in which the ball should be launched in each state. ing. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction in which the player should launch the ball is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This navigation is configured to display a direction that is advantageous to the player in each state.

First, in the normal state, a right-handed navigation, that is, a display recommending that the game ball be launched to the right side of the board is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the suggestion display is made so as to hit the ball toward the second entrance 640 provided on the right side in the front view with respect to the game board 13. This is because, in the normal state, it is a high probability state of a normal symbol, and the ball easily wins the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to launch the ball aiming at the second entrance 640. .. This normal state continues until either jackpot is hit.

In the normal state, when one of the jackpots A to D is reached, after the jackpot, the state shifts to the probability variation state. Even in this probability variation state, the right-hand navigation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This probability variation state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot or until the jackpot E is won. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times without winning the jackpot, it shifts to a normal state, and when the jackpot E is won, it shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot is over.

In the normal state, or in the low-probability state that shifts to when jackpot E is won in the probability variation state, left-handed navigation, that is, a display recommending that the game ball be launched to the right side of the board, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 To be done. That is, the suggestion display is made so as to hit the ball with the first ball entrance 64 provided at the lower center of the game board 13. This is because in the low probability state, the first ball entrance 64 is easier to win the ball than the second ball entrance 640. This low-probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning the big hit, or until one of the big hits A to D is won. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the normal state, and when one of the jackpots A to D is won, the state shifts to the probability change state.

Although illustration is omitted, the right-hand navigation is also displayed in each jackpot round. In the present embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Because it is difficult to make a prize.

Further, as described above, since the normal state is set during the big hit, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened, so that the ball hit toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It becomes easier to win the second entrance located directly above. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls is 4, which is the maximum value, by the end of the big hit. Furthermore, when there is a lottery result that is a big hit in the reserved balls, there is a 50% chance of being a "big hit E" (see FIG. 63). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect from being repeated for a long time, and it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring in the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 65, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, each process of S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 is the same as each process of S101 to S103 and S107 to S109 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in the first embodiment. The process of is executed. Then, in the timer interrupt process in the third embodiment, in place of the special symbol variation process (S104), the start winning process (S105), and the normal symbol variation process (S106) in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation process 3 (S121), start winning process 2 (S122), and normal symbol variation process 2 (S123) are executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the special symbol variation process 3 (S121) described above will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 3 (S121). Special symbol variation process 3 (S121), similarly to the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, the third It is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in the symbol display device 81.

In each of the special symbol variation process 3, S201, S202, S209 to S215, and S218 to S220, S201, S202, S209 to S215, and the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S218 to S220 is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation process 3 in the third embodiment, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203c2 (second entry The number N2 of suspensions of variable display of special symbols based on winning in the ball opening 640 is acquired (S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203c2 (N2) is larger than 0 (S222), and it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203c2 is larger than 0. Is (S222: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203c2 (N2) is decremented by 1 (S223), and the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203c2 after subtraction (N2) is shown. A command for the number of reserved balls is set (S225). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S225, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225), the special symbol variation start process is performed (S208), and the book The process ends. The method of shifting the data is the same as the process of S207 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203c2 is 0 (S222: No), then the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203c1 (first The number of times N1 of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol based on the winning in the ball entrance 64 is acquired (S225).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203c1 acquired by the process of S225 is larger than 0 (S226), and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203c2 (N2) is If it is 0 (S226: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203c2 (N2) is larger than 1 (S226: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203c1 (N1) is decremented by 1 ( S227), after the subtraction the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203c1 value (N1) is set a holding ball number command (S228). The reserved ball number command set here is also stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and is executed by the MPU 201 in the same manner as the reserved ball number command set in the process of S224. In the external output process (S1101) (see FIG. 69), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S228, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a1 is shifted (S229), the special symbol variation start process is performed (S208), and the book The process ends. The method of shifting the data is the same as the process of S207 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above.

In this way, in the special symbol variation process 3 of the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are separately managed, and at the start of the variation, the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is prioritized. It is configured to be subtracted. This is because the special symbol 2 is configured so that the lottery is preferentially executed.

Further, in the special symbol variation process 3 in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203e is 0 (S214: No), or it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203e is greater than 0 ( (S214: Yes), the process shifts to S230 when the value of the probability changing counter 203e is subtracted by 1. In the process of S230, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S230).

In the process of S230, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S230: Yes), the value of the state transition counter 203m is decremented by 1 (S231), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, in the process of S230, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S230: No), the process of S231 is skipped and the process proceeds to S218. To do. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the value of the state transition counter 203m, it is determined whether or not the current is a low probability state of a normal symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the above-described starting winning processing 2 (S122) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process 2 (S122). In the starting winning process 2 (S122), it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning entrance 64 or the second winning opening 640, and if there is a starting winning, a value indicated by various random number counters. Is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

In the processing of S601 of the starting winning processing 2, the same processing as the processing of S601 in the starting winning processing (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the start winning process 2 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 (in the special symbol 1 The number of times N1 of suspension of variable display is acquired (S621). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (that is, 4) (S622).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 is 4 When it is determined that it is not less than (that is, 4) (S603: No), the process proceeds to S626. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S622: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S623). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203c1 changed by calculation is set to a holding sphere number command (S624).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203c1 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the number of reserved balls command in the process of S624, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S625).

When the value of the first random number counter C1 is acquired by the processing of S625, when it is determined that there is no winning in the first ball entrance 64 by the processing of S601 (S601: No), or the first winning If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if there is a winning in the sphere 64 (S603: No), then the sphere is It is determined whether or not a second winning opening 640 has been won (S626).

In the processing of S626, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S626: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203c2 (the number N2 of fluctuation display holdings in the special symbol 2) is set. It is acquired (S627). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (that is, 4) (S628).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S626: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is 4 When it is determined that it is not less than (that is, 4) (S628: No), the process proceeds to S632. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S626: Yes), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S628: Yes), the special symbol 2 is held. The value (N2) of the ball number counter 203c2 is incremented by 1 (S629). Then, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203c2 changed by calculation is set to a holding sphere number command (S630).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c2 from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. To do.

After setting the number of reserved balls command in the process of S630, the value of the first random number counter C1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 65) is acquired (S631).

When the value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained by the processing of S631, when it is determined that there is no winning in the second entrance 640 by the processing of S626 (S626: No), or the second winning If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203c2 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) even if there is a winning in the ball opening 640 (S628: No), the prefetching process is executed. Then (S632), the present process is terminated. This pre-reading process (S632) is a process for previously determining the lottery result of the special symbol from each counter value acquired based on the start winning. This prefetching process will be described with reference to the subsequent FIG.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S632) described above. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has newly won in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when it is determined that there is no new winning in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S4101: No), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a new winning in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S4101: Yes), the processes of S4102 to S4110 are executed. In each of these processes of S4102 to S4110, the same process as each of the processes of S607 to S615 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the number of reserved balls is separately managed according to the type of the ball entrance into which the ball has entered, and the look-ahead is executed for the starting winning in any of the ball entrances. It is configured to do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the above-mentioned normal symbol variation process 2 (S123) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process 2 (S123). Normal symbol variation process 2 (S123), similarly to the normal symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 27), the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the first entrance 64. Is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the.

Of the normal symbol variation process 2 (S123), in each of the processes of S701 to S707, S712, S713, S718, and S722 to S725, S701 to S707 in the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 27) of the first embodiment. , S712, S713, S718, and S722 to S725. Then, in the normal symbol variation process 2 in the third embodiment, in the process of S707, when the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S707), then It is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 1 (that is, whether or not the state is a low probability state of a normal symbol) (S731).

In the process of S731, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S731: Yes), it indicates that the current state is the low probability state of the normal symbol, and thus the second obtained in the process of S707. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random number table for low probability, the lottery result of the normal symbol is acquired (S732). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9A).

On the other hand, in the processing of S731, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (S731: No), it indicates that the current state is the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, and thus the processing of S707. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process and the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is obtained (S733). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see FIG. 9A). After the processing of S732 or the processing of S733 is completed, the processing proceeds to S712.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to reset the value of the state transition counter 203m (that is, clear 0) when setting the start of the special symbol jackpot. For this reason, during the big hit of the special symbol, the value of the state transition counter 203m is determined to be 0. Therefore, during the big hit, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit based on the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability use. It That is, during the big hit, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened, so that the ball can be easily won into the second ball entrance 640 during the big hit. Therefore, the number of retained balls can easily reach the maximum value (that is, four) by the end of the big hit.

By the process of S712, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S712: Yes), and the display mode at the time of hit is set by the process of S713 (S713), then, whether the value of the state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 or not. It is determined whether or not (S734). Then, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (S734: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and therefore the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is provided. The opening period is set to 0.2 seconds, the opening count is set to 1 (S735), and the process proceeds to S737. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (S734: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, it is attached to the second entrance 640. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 1 second, and the opening frequency is set to 2 (S736), and the process proceeds to S737.

As described above, since the value of the state transition counter 203m is set to 0 during the big hit, when a normal symbol hits during the big hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is attached. The opening period is set to 1 second, and the opening count is set to 2 times. Therefore, the balls easily enter the second ball entrance 640 during the big hit, so that the number of reserved balls can easily reach the maximum value (that is, 4 balls) by the end of the big hit.

In the process of S737, it is determined whether or not the value of the state transition counter state transition counter 203m is greater than 0 (S737). Then, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S737: Yes), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is 30. The second time is set (S738), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the state transition counter 203m is 0 (that is, in the high probability state of the normal symbol) (S737: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is 3 The second time is set (S739), and this processing ends.

As described above, the value of the state transition counter 203m is set to 0 during the big hit, so when the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed during the big hit, during the low probability state of the normal symbol. By comparison, a shorter fluctuation period (3 seconds) is selected. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the number of times the normal symbol fluctuates during the big hit, the number of times the normal symbol is hit during the big hit can also be increased. Therefore, the balls easily enter the second ball entrance 640 during the big hit, so that the number of reserved balls can easily reach the maximum value (that is, 4) by the end of the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main processing. As described above, this main process is a process of executing the main control of the game in a 4 ms cycle.

Of the main processing (see FIG. 70), in the processing of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116, the processing of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 31) is performed. The same processing is executed. Then, in the main process in the third embodiment, the big hit control process 3 (S1131) is executed instead of the big hit control process (S1104) in the first embodiment. Details of the jackpot control process 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 3. In this jackpot control process 3, similar to the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, the opening/closing of the specific winning opening (big opening mouth) 65a during the jackpot is set, or a new round is started. This is a process of setting a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the jackpot control processes 3, S1201 to S1208, and S1210, the same processes as S1201 to S1208 and S1210 in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment are executed. It Then, in the jackpot control process 3 in the third embodiment, when the jackpot end is set (S1208), the set value corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set based on the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64(a)). This is read out and set (S1231), and this processing ends. Since the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64(a)) defines the setting value according to the state, in S1231, the state to be set in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 64(a)). It suffices to execute a simple process of selecting the setting value corresponding to. Therefore, for example, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of executing a program that calculates a set value according to the state. Therefore, the state after the jackpot can be set without delay.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, of the two types of entrances (the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640), the second entrance 640 is the specific winning entrance. (Large opening) 65a is provided directly above. Then, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is configured to be easily opened (that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol). With this configuration, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball inlet 640 can be easily opened during the big hit when the state of the normal symbol needs to be the same as the normal state. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball hit by the player during the jackpot to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the number of reserved balls does not exist in the special variation period set after the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which no fluctuation occurs to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely without ending the special variation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, when the pseudo interval effect is finished within a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect has been executed eight times, a non-variable state (the variation pattern effect is not executed. Moreover, the more often the state where there is no holding ball) occurs, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed during the pseudo interval effect decreases. Therefore, the possibility of another big hit after the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the balls easily enter the second ball entrance 640 during the big hit, so that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is easily maximized. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which there is no fluctuation during the pseudo-interval effect, and thus it is possible to increase the possibility of another big hit after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the big hit state continues for a long time, and thus the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot is a jackpot, which is a “jackpot E” (that is, a jackpot that shifts to a disadvantageous state for the player after the jackpot is over compared to other jackpot types). Although it is set to 50% of the case, it is not limited to this and may be arbitrarily set. For example, when it is determined that the distribution rate of "big hit E" is 50%, the winning rate will be too high. For example, by setting the proportion of "big hit E" to 60% or 70%, the game It may be configured to increase the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the person. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball-out rate becomes too low, the ratio of “big hit E” is set to, for example, 40% or 30% to reduce the big hit which is disadvantageous to the player. Good.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same big hit type is selected as long as the value of the first hit type counter value CS1 in the case of a big hit is the same, irrespective of the type of the entrance into which the ball is won. However, different jackpot types may be selected depending on the type of the entrance. For example, if the jackpot is a big hit based on the ball winning the first entrance 64, the jackpot E is larger than if the ball was a big hit based on entering the second entrance 640. It may be configured to be difficult to select. Thereby, the big hit E can be made difficult to continue. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the low probability state of the normal symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player, from being repeated endlessly, and thus it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for the game from being reduced. Further, the jackpot E when the ball is a big hit based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, rather than when the ball is a big hit based on the ball entering the first entrance 64. May be easily selected. As a result, the jackpots A to D are continuous, and it is possible to prevent the high-probability state of the normal symbol, which is advantageous for the player, from being repeated for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming too high and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the third embodiment, two types of ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640) are provided, and by setting a high probability state of a normal symbol during a big hit, 2 It was easy for the ball to enter the entrance 640. As a result, the number of retained balls was likely to reach the maximum value (that is, 4) during the big hit.

In addition to this, in this modification, two types of specific winning openings (specific winning openings 65a and specific winning openings 650a) are provided, and when the ball wins the specific winning openings 650a during the big hit, the big hit ends. Afterwards, it is configured to shift to a high probability state of special symbols. Further, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is configured to be different depending on whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit or a special symbol 2 is a big hit. That is, the easiness of transition to the high-probability state of the special symbol is different between the case where the special symbol 1 is a big hit and the special symbol 2 is a big hit. Although the details will be described later, it is possible to prevent the exit rate from becoming too high by providing an entrance for which it is difficult to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol. In addition, by providing a ball entrance that makes it easy to move to a high probability state of a special symbol, the ball enters the ball entrance, giving the player an expectation for a high probability state of a special symbol. You can hold me.

First, with reference to FIG. 72, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an outline of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, in the game board 13 in the modified example of the third embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the lower right portion in front view, as in the third embodiment. And the 2nd entrance 640 is provided right above the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640, and by hitting a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a rotates about a direction perpendicular to the game board 13. , It becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance.

In addition, in the present modification, the variable winning device 650 is provided in the lower left direction of the first ball entrance 64. The variable winning device 650 is composed of a specific winning opening 650a and an electric accessory 650b that accompanies the specific winning opening 650. Normally, the electric winning object 650b closes the specific winning opening 650a so that the ball It is difficult to enter the ball. On the other hand, in a predetermined round of jackpot (for example, the second round), the electric accessory 650b operates and the specific winning opening 650a is opened for a certain period (for example, 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds). As a result, the ball becomes in a state where it is easy to win the specific winning opening 650a, and if the ball can be won, the state shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. The high-probability state of this special symbol, as in the third embodiment, continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 12 times. In this way, it is determined whether or not the ball shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol depending on whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 650a, so whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Can be made visually easy to understand. Further, since the player can devise the timing of hitting the ball, etc., if the player can put the ball into the specific winning port 650a, he or she can obtain a high probability state of a special symbol by himself. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction and achievement.

Further, as described above, since the specific winning opening 650a is arranged at the lower left of the first winning opening 64, in the round in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened (for example, the second round), the player is identified. The ball launched to win the winning opening 650a can easily enter the first winning opening 64 as well. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to easily store the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 in the jackpot, but in the present modification, in addition to this, a predetermined round (for example, the second round). In (), it is configured to easily increase the reserved balls of the special symbol 1. The maximum number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the maximum number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be stored in a maximum of 4, respectively, so that in the present modification, the total number of reserved balls is 8 by the end of the jackpot. It can be easy to be in the state of individual. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of reserved balls does not exist and the fluctuation does not occur during the special fluctuation period that is set after the jackpot is over. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely without ending the special variation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, when the pseudo interval effect is finished within a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect has been executed eight times, a non-variable state (the variation pattern effect is not executed. Moreover, the more often the state where there is no holding ball) occurs, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed during the pseudo interval effect decreases. Therefore, the possibility of another big hit after the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in the present modification, as described above, the balls easily enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 during the big hit, so that the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are reserved. It is configured to maximize the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which there is no fluctuation during the pseudo-interval effect, and thus it is possible to increase the possibility of another big hit after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the big hit state continues for a long time, and thus the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Next, the first hit type selection table 202b of the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a is different between when the jackpot is obtained by the special symbol 1 lottery and when the jackpot is obtained by the special symbol 2 lottery. In the first hit type selection table 202b of this modified example, the big hit type and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 650a for each type of special symbol are defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the specific winning opening 650a is configured to be opened only in the second round of the big hit, and in the other rounds (the first round and the third round and thereafter), the specific winning port is formed. The mouth 65a is configured to be opened. The specific winning opening 650a opened in the second round is closed after the opening period defined in the first winning type selection table 202b elapses. In the second round of the big hit, a display (left-handed navigation) that prompts the player to hit a ball on the left side of the game board 13 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to prevent the player from forgetting to aim at the specific winning opening 650a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to acquire the high probability state of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 72, the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 0 to 8 is a "bonus A1" (3R short open jackpot) with three rounds of the jackpot. In addition, when the "big hit A1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 1, the opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds is set in the second round of the big hit. On the other hand, when the "big hit A1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2, the opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds is set.

It should be noted that it takes 0.5 seconds or more from when the player hits the ball toward the specific winning opening 650a until it hits the specific winning opening 650a. When the pattern is selected, it is difficult to make the ball win the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, when the "big hit A1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 1, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit and the low probability state of 100 normal symbols is set. .. That is, the state corresponding to the case where the jackpot E in the third embodiment ends is set. On the other hand, when the 5-second opening pattern is selected, it is sufficient time for the shot ball to reach the specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in many cases, the player specifies the ball in the second round. A prize can be given to the mouth 650a. Therefore, when the "big hit A1" is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit is ended, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 9 to 17, the big hit type is “big hit A2” (3R long open big hit) with three rounds of big hits. In the case of "big hit A2", regardless of whether it is a lottery for the special symbol 1 or a lottery for the special symbol 2, an opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds is set. Therefore, in the second round of "big hit A2", it becomes easier to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a, so in many cases, a high probability state of 12 special symbols is set after the big hit ends, and normally The high probability state of the symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 18 to 24, the big hit type is “big hit B1” (4R short open big hit) with four rounds of big hits. Similar to the "big hit A1", when the "big hit B1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 1, an opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds is set in the second round of the big hit. .. On the other hand, when the "big hit B1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2, an opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds is set. Therefore, when the "big hit B1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 1, the low probability state of the special symbol is often set after the big hit ends, and the low probability state of 100 normal symbols is set. .. On the other hand, when the "big hit B1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit ends, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ..

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 25 to 31, the big hit type is “big hit B2” (4R long open big hit) with four big hit rounds. Similar to "big hit A2", if you win "big hit B2", regardless of whether it is a lottery for special symbol 1 or a lottery for special symbol 2, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds. The pattern is set. Therefore, when the "big hit B2" is won, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 32 to 63, the big hit type is “big hit C1” (6R short open big hit) with 6 rounds of big hits. Similar to "big hit A1" and "big hit B1", if you win "big hit C1" in the lottery for special symbol 1, the special winning opening 650a will be opened for 0.5 seconds in the second round of big hit. The pattern is set. On the other hand, when the "big hit C1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2, an opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds is set. Therefore, when the "big hit C1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot is over, and the low probability state of 100 normal symbols is set. .. On the other hand, in the case where the “big hit C1” is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit ends, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ..

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 64 to 95, the big hit type is “big hit C2” (6R long open big hit) with 6 rounds of big hits. As in the case of "big hit A2" and "big hit B2", if the "big hit C2" is won, the special winning opening 650a is 5 regardless of whether the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected. An opening pattern that is opened for a second is set. Therefore, when winning the “big hit C2”, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit ends, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 96, 97, the big hit type is “big hit D1” (15R short open big hit) with 15 rounds of big hits. Like "big hit A1", "big hit B1", and "big hit C1", if you win "big hit D1" in the lottery for special symbol 1, the specific winning opening 650a is 0.5 in the second round of big hit. A release pattern is set that releases only seconds. On the other hand, when the "big hit D1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2, an opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds is set. Therefore, when the "big hit D1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 1, in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit ends, and the low probability state of 100 normal symbols is set. .. On the other hand, when the "big hit D1" is won in the lottery for the special symbol 2, in many cases, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit ends, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ..

When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is 98, 99, the jackpot type is “big hit D2” (15R long open big hit) with 15 rounds of big hits. Similar to "big hit A2", "big hit B2", and "big hit C2", if you win "big hit D2", regardless of whether it is a lottery for special symbol 1 or a lottery for special symbol 2, An opening pattern in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 5 seconds is set. Therefore, when the "big hit D2" is won, the high probability state of the special symbol is set 12 times after the big hit in many cases, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, when the big hit is caused by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the specific winning opening 650a is relatively long in the second round of the big hit regardless of the big hit type ( It is opened for 5 seconds. If you can win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the end of the jackpot, so in many cases, when the jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the jackpot. The high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the end of.

On the other hand, half of the cases where the special symbol 1 is a big hit by the lottery, the big prize (“big hit A1”, “the big hit A1”, “the special jackpot 650a is opened for a very short time (0.5 seconds) in the second round of the big hit. "Big hit B1", "Big hit C1", and "Big hit D1"). Therefore, if these jackpots are obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1, it is difficult to win the ball to the specific winning opening 650a, so in many cases, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. It Therefore, compared to the lottery for the special symbol 1, it is more advantageous for the player to win the lottery for the special symbol 2.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, in a round other than the second round of the big hit, a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right (right-handed navigation) is displayed in order to win the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. To be done. Further, since the jackpot of this modification is given at least 3 rounds, the player has more chances to aim at the right side of the game board 13. As a result, during the big hit, an opportunity to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 provided directly above the specific winning opening 65a becomes an opportunity to enter the ball into the first entrance 64. Compared to many. Furthermore, in this modification, when there are reserved balls for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, in the special variation period after the jackpot is over, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is preferentially performed. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special variation period, the chance of being a jackpot due to the lottery for the special symbol 2 is high. .. Therefore, the jackpot and the high probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency of the jackpot being started again can be increased after the pseudo interval effect executed after the jackpot is finished). It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, two types of specific winning openings (specific winning openings 65a and specific winning openings 650a) are provided, and when a ball wins the specific winning openings 650a during a big hit. In addition, it is configured to shift to a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. This makes it easy to visually understand whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, since the player can devise the timing of hitting the ball, etc., if the player can put the ball into the specific winning port 650a, he or she can obtain a high probability state of a special symbol by himself. It is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction and achievement.

In addition, the special winning opening 650a is configured to be different depending on whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, and the special symbol 2 is a big hit. If it becomes, it is configured to be advantageous to the player (that is, the chance to put the ball into the specific winning port 650a increases). Furthermore, in this modification, when there are reserved balls for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. Therefore, in the special variation period after the jackpot is over, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is preferentially performed. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special variation period, the chance of being a jackpot due to the lottery for the special symbol 2 is high. .. Therefore, the jackpot and the high probability state of the special symbol can be easily repeated (that is, the frequency of the jackpot being started again can be increased after the pseudo interval effect executed after the jackpot is finished). It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot will continue for a long time.

In addition, since the specific winning opening 650a is arranged at the lower left of the first winning opening 64, in the round (second round) when the specific winning opening 650a is opened, the player wins the specific winning opening 650a. The ball launched to try to make it easier to win the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, in the second round, it is possible to easily increase the reserved balls of the special symbol 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the number of reserved balls does not exist and the fluctuation does not occur during the special fluctuation period that is set after the jackpot is over. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pseudo interval effect from continuing indefinitely without ending the special variation period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the special variation period, when the pseudo interval effect is finished within a predetermined time (10 seconds) regardless of whether or not the variation pattern effect is executed eight times, the state of no variation (variation pattern As the effect is not executed, and the state in which there are no holding balls) is more likely to occur, the number of times the special symbols are drawn during the pseudo interval effect is reduced. Therefore, the possibility of another big hit after the pseudo interval effect is reduced. On the other hand, in the present modification, as described above, the balls easily enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 during the big hit, so that the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are reserved. It is configured to maximize the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which there is no fluctuation during the pseudo-interval effect, and thus it is possible to increase the possibility of another big hit after the pseudo-interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the big hit state continues for a long time, and thus the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In this modified example, as compared to the lottery for the special symbol 1, when the jackpot is obtained by the lottery for the special symbol 2, the possibility of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol is increased. , But not limited to this. For example, the lottery for the special symbol 1 may be configured to increase the possibility of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol when a big hit occurs. As described above, in the third embodiment and the modified example of the third embodiment, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set after the jackpot is over, the first entry is made until the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is finished. A suggestion display urging the ball to enter the ball opening 64 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the lottery for the special symbol 1 is mainly executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, if the special symbol 1 lottery is a big hit and it is configured to be difficult to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol is repeated endlessly, and the player's motivation for the game is reduced. There is a risk that it will come out. Therefore, by increasing the possibility of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol in the case of a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation of the player.

In this modification, the specific winning opening 650a is opened for 0.5 seconds or 5 seconds in the second round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round or the third round, or may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds. Moreover, you may comprise so that the round opened only in a part of big hit may be provided. For example, a round in which the specific winning opening 650a is opened only in the "big hit D1" and the "big hit D2" may be provided. Furthermore, the opening period of the specific winning opening 650a is not limited to the aspect of this modification, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the open period may be set to 1 second and 10 seconds.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. In the above-described first embodiment, the variation pattern effect in which the variation period is fixed is selected for each number of times of special symbol lottery in the special variation period. More specifically, if the special symbol lottery performed the first time or the second time after the jackpot is over, the fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation A) with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected, and the jackpot If the special symbol lottery that was done the 3rd or 4th time after the end was out of the selection, the variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second was selected, and the special symbol that was done 5th to 8th after the jackpot was over. If the lottery was missed, the variation pattern with the variation time of 0.5 seconds was selected. With this configuration, the time required to execute the variable pattern effect that is out of the predetermined number of times (8 times in the first embodiment) is the fixed time (8 seconds). In addition, if the jackpot is a jackpot between the end of the jackpot and the lottery of the special symbol eight times, the variation time is changed according to the remaining predetermined number of times (remaining time until the predetermined time) (for example, the first If it is set to 8 seconds, and if it is the second time, 6 seconds), the special fluctuation period is set to a fixed time (8 seconds). In other words, in order to set the special fluctuation period to the predetermined time (8 seconds) in all the lottery times, it was necessary to prepare fluctuation patterns that are big hits with different fluctuation times according to all the fluctuation times.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, for each number of times the special symbol is drawn in the special change period, a fixed change period change depending on whether or not the lottery result and the lottery result (prefetch result) of the holding area are a big hit. The pattern effect is selected. Thereby, according to the remaining predetermined number of times (remaining time up to a predetermined time), the variation pattern effect that is a big hit and the variation pattern effect that is off from the time when the lottery result (prefetch result) of the big hit can be discriminated. The production time can be set. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the types of effect time of the variation pattern effect that is a big hit, and thus it is possible to save the capacity of the ROM 234. Further, it is possible to gradually reduce the variation time of the variation display executed a plurality of times in one special variation period, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is hit during the special variation period. Here, in the first embodiment, in the case of a big hit during the special change period, a change pattern having a longer change time than that of the change pattern effect executed one time before, except when a big hit occurs in the eighth lottery. It was configured so that the performance could be selected. For this reason, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot has been hit during the special fluctuation period by executing the fluctuation pattern effect with a long fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period. There was a risk that I could not enjoy it. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the variation pattern effect can be reduced as the number of lottery for the special symbol increases, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is hit in the middle of the special variation period. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether or not it is a big hit depending on the time. Therefore, it is difficult to predict the result of the pseudo interval effect in advance, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that the contents of the special variation pattern selection table 202e of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 are changed. is there. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are performed in the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special variation pattern selection table 202e in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the special variation pattern selection table 202e. The special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is a data table that determines the fluctuation time during the special fluctuation period, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 74, the special variation pattern selection table 202e in the fourth embodiment, the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the jackpot is over, and whether or not there is a lottery result for the starting ball or the holding ball. The change time during the special change period is specified according to. According to the special fluctuation pattern selection table 202e, when there is a holding ball that becomes a big hit, the big hit fluctuation of the holding ball and the holding ball that performs a fluctuation display of deviation until the fluctuation of the holding ball The variable period is configured to be a fixed time (8 seconds).

This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 shows a correspondence relationship between the variation effect, the big hit effect, and the state of the specific winning opening, which is executed during the pseudo interval effect executed after the big hit ends. FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing a case where the jackpot is a big prize in the third special symbol lottery after the jackpot is over, and FIG. 75(b) is a seventh special symbol after the jackpot is over. It is the figure which showed the case where it becomes a big hit in the lottery. For example, when the jackpot is the big prize in the third special symbol lottery after the big hit ends, that is, the lottery result stored in the reserved second area is the first time the special symbol lottery is performed after the big hit ends. If it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a big hit, the special variation F having a variation time of 4 seconds is selected as the aspect of the variation pattern effect executed for the first time. Further, when the execution of the special variation F is completed and the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the executed area (that is, when the second special symbol lottery timing comes after the jackpot is over), the reserved first area is Since it is a big hit state, the special variation A having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected. In addition, in the special symbol lottery executed for the third time after the jackpot is over, the data of the execution area is the lottery result indicating the jackpot, so the special variation A having a variation time of 2 seconds is selected (FIG. 75). (A)).

As another case, if the jackpot is finished in the 7th special symbol lottery after the jackpot ends, in the special symbol lottery executed for the 1st to 3rd times, there is no information indicating the jackpot in the reserved ball. .. Therefore, the special variation A (2 seconds) is selected for the first and second times, and the special variation B (1 second) is selected for the third time. In addition, in the form of the variation pattern effect executed from the fourth time to the seventh time, the fourth time is the probability change number 4 is the hold 3, the fifth is the probability change number 5, the fifth is the hold 2, and the sixth is the positive change. Since the number of times of holding is 1 at the 6th time and the 7th time is starting at the 7th time of probability change, the 4th and 5th are special fluctuations B (1 second), and the 6th and 7th are special fluctuations. C (0, 5 seconds) is selected (FIG. 75(b)).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the period from the end of the big hit to the start of the next big hit is set to 8 seconds, and the type of the effect time of the fluctuation pattern effect is 7 of the special fluctuations A to G. Compared to the first embodiment, which requires types, it is possible to configure with five types of special fluctuations A to D and F, which are types with less effect time. Further, it is possible to surely gradually reduce the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed a plurality of times in one special fluctuation period.

Therefore, the types of various tables such as the display data table according to the variation time of each variation pattern can be reduced as compared with the first embodiment, and the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. Further, in the first embodiment, the player can recognize that a big hit has occurred in the middle of the special change period due to the long change time of the change display, and the player for the final effect of the special change period. The interest of the player in the game can be improved without causing the problem that the interest of the player may decrease.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84. In the above-described first embodiment, the payout speed of prize balls is configured to be constant. In other words, when payout of prize balls is performed, the payout motor 216 is configured to suspend the payout for 1 second (set a payout suspension period of 1 second) every time 10 prize balls are paid out in succession. .. Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set such that the time required for the payout motor 216 to pay out 10 prize balls is 1 second.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured such that the payout speed of the prize balls is different depending on the number of rounds. Specifically, the payout speed (the rotation speed of the payout motor 216) of the prize balls is slowed down as the number of rounds is increased, and the prize balls are paid out for a longer period as the latter half of the jackpot. Thereby, the prize balls are gradually paid out even during the pseudo-interval performance after the jackpot is over, and the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo-interval performance. .. That is, by suppressing the concentration of the player's consciousness on the pseudo interval effect, it is more difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is that a payout speed selection table 202g is added to the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and the RAM 203. To the payout counter 203n, a part of the process included in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is different, and executed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. This is the point that the various processes performed are different. The other configurations, the other processes executed by the main controller 110, the various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG. 76A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76A, the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout speed selection table 202g in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 77, this payout speed selection table 202g is referred to for setting the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 in the case of paying out prize balls in each round of jackpots. Is a data table that is created. By referring to the payout speed selection table 202g, the payout speed of the prize balls can be made slower in the latter half round of the jackpot. Therefore, since the payout of the prize balls during the jackpot is continued even after the jackpot is over (that is, during the pseudo interval effect), the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends.

FIG. 76B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 76(b), the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment is provided with a payout counter 203n in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The payout counter 203n is a counter that is updated according to the number of rounds per jackpot. In the present embodiment, the payout speed of the prize balls is varied based on the value of the payout counter 203n and the specified content of the payout speed selection table 202g described above. If the payout counter 203n has a value of 0, it indicates a normal state other than the jackpot state or a state of the first round of the jackpot. Then, each time the jackpot round advances, the value of the payout counter 203n is incremented by one. That is, the value of the payout counter 203n is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of rounds of the big hit. The value of the payout counter 203n is cleared to 0 when the big hit ends (see S1242 in FIG. 80). Further, in the startup process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 30), 0 is also set when the RAM 203 is initialized (see S1014 in FIG. 30).

Next, the payout speed selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 77. As described above, the payout speed selection table 202g is a data table that is referred to in order to set the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out prize balls in each jackpot round.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the payout speed selection table 202g, the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is defined in association with the value of the payout counter 203n. Specifically, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, in the first round of jackpot or in the normal state), a normal speed is set as the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 ( 10 prize balls are paid out per second). When the value of the payout counter 203n is 1 (that is, in the second big round), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is "low speed 1", that is, eight prizes per second. The speed at which the ball is delivered is set. When the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, when the jackpot is the third round), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is “low speed 2”, that is, 6 per second. The speed at which the prize balls are paid out is set. On the other hand, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, after the fourth round of the jackpot), the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 is "low speed 3", that is, 5 per second. The speed at which individual prize balls are paid out is set.

In this way, as the jackpot round progresses, the speed at which the prize balls are paid out is gradually reduced, so that the payout of the prize balls during the jackpot is completed after the jackpot (that is, the pseudo interval effect). Middle) will be continued. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends. Also, even if the jackpot is not a big hit after the pseudo-interval production, by continuing to pay out the prize balls, it is possible to immerse the player in the aftermath of the previous big hit, and disappointing that the big hit did not continue. The feeling can be reduced. The payout speed is not limited to the value specified in the payout speed selection table 202g of the present embodiment, and can be set arbitrarily. The variation of the payout speed is not limited to four types (normal speed, low speed 1, low speed 2, and low speed 3). For example, the number of variations may be smaller than that of the present embodiment, such as using two types of payout speeds. Further, variations may be increased as compared with the present embodiment, for example, the payout speed may be 10 kinds.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various kinds of processing executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. First, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As described above, this main processing is processing for executing main control of the game at a 4 ms cycle.

Of the main processing, in each of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116, the same processing as each of S1101 to S1103 and S1105 to S1116 in the main processing (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment is performed. Executed. In the main process of the fifth embodiment, when the prize ball counting signal or the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 is read in the process of S1103, the payout command setting process is executed (S1141), and further, The big hit control process 4 (S1141) is executed instead of the big hit control process (S1104) in the first embodiment. Details of the payout command setting process (S1141) and the jackpot control process 4 (S1142) will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

First, the above-mentioned payout command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The payout command setting process is a process for setting a payout command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay a prize ball. The payout command is set to include information indicating the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216. Based on this payout command, the payout control device 111 executes the payout of prize balls based on the information indicating the number of prize balls and the information indicating the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216.

In the payout command setting process (see FIG. 79), first, it is determined whether or not the winning information is present (S4201). Here, the winning information includes, in addition to the winning of the ball for the specific winning opening 65a, the winning information for the first winning opening 64 and the normal winning opening 67. In the processing of S4201, if it is determined that there is no winning information (S4201: No), this processing is ended as it is, and returns to the main processing (see FIG. 78).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, if it is determined that the winning information is present (S4201: Yes), then, whether or not there is winning information indicating the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the winning information. It is determined (S4202). When it is determined that the winning information indicating the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is present (S4202: Yes), the value of the payout counter 202n is read out and the specified content of the payout speed selection table 202g is obtained. By comparing, the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 when paying out the prize ball this time is specified (S4203). Then, a payout command including information indicating the specified payout speed and information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid is set (S4204), and this processing is ended.

In the processing of S4202, there is no winning information indicating the winning of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a (that is, only the winning information of the first winning opening 64 or the normal winning opening 67 is present). If determined (S4202: No), it includes information indicating a payout speed corresponding to the normal speed (that is, a payout speed at which 10 prize balls are paid out in 1 second) and information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out. A payout command is set (S4205), and this processing ends. The payout command set by the processing of S4204 or S4205 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the payout control device 111. Upon receipt of the payout command, the payout control device 111 extracts information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and information indicating the payout speed from the payout command, and executes the payout based on the extracted information.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 80. The big hit control process 4 (see FIG. 80) is the same as the big hit control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Is set and a round number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the start of a new round is set.

In each of the jackpot control processes 4, each process of S1201 to S1210 executes the same process as each of the processes of S1201 to S1210 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment. Then, in the jackpot control process 4 in the fifth embodiment, it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1202), the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a is opened (S1203), and the round number command is set. If (S1204) is performed, then, 1 is added to the value of the payout counter 203n (S1241), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 78). By updating the value of the payout counter 203n at the start timing of a new round, the payout speed can be set to a speed corresponding to each round from the beginning of each round.

Further, in the jackpot control process 4 of the present embodiment, the end of the jackpot is set (S1208), and the values after the jackpot end are set in the various counters (probability variation counter 203e, time saving medium counter 203f, special variation counter 203g). (S1209) Next, the value of the payout counter 203n is reset by setting 0 (S1242), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the payout control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84. First, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 111. This main process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this main process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4301). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value and the interrupt mode is set. Next, it waits for the receipt of the payout permission command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S4302: No). When the payout permission command is received (S4302: Yes), the RAM access is permitted (S4303) and the external interrupt vector is set (S4304).

After that, the data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305), and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4305: Yes), the process is performed to clear (erase) the backup data, S4315. Transition to. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4305: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area of the RAM 213 (S4306), and if it is not stored (S4306). : No), since backup data is not stored, the process proceeds to S4315 in this case as well. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the backup area (S4306: Yes), the RAM judgment value is calculated (S4307). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S4308: No), that is, calculated. If the RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S4315. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

In the processing from S4315, the initialization processing of the RAM 213 is executed. In this initialization processing, first, the used area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S4315), and the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S4316). After that, the MPU211 peripheral device is initialized (S4317), interrupts are permitted (S4318), and the process proceeds to a payout control process described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 has not been pressed (S4305: No), the power-off occurrence information has been set (S4306: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal. (S4308: Yes), processing at power recovery (processing at power shutdown recovery) is executed. That is, the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown is restored (S4309) and the power shutdown occurrence information is cleared (S4310). Further, the MPU211 peripheral device is initialized (S4311), and the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 213 (S4312). Furthermore, it is confirmed whether or not the interrupt is in the enabled state before the power is turned off (S4313), and if the interrupt is in the enabled state (S4313: Yes), the interrupt is enabled (S4314), while the interrupt is prohibited when the power is turned off. If it is in the state (S4313: No), the process is returned to the address before the power-off while the interrupt is prohibited.

Next, the above-mentioned payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This payout control process is a process that is executed subsequent to the main process of the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 81) and sets the payout of prize balls and lent balls. In this payout control process, first, a command from the main control device 110 is acquired, the total number of prize balls is stored (S4401), and then, the firing permission is set to the firing control device 112 (S4402). ). Then, the state of the state return switch is checked, and if the state return switch is pressed, the state return operation is executed (S4403). Here, the state return switch is a switch for causing the payout motor 216 to perform the state return operation by being pressed by a clerk or the like in the hall when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs. Specifically, when the state return switch is pressed, as a state return operation, the payout motor 216 rotates in the opposite direction to the normal state, and the ball clogging is eliminated (that is, the return to the normal state). It is configured.

Then, the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is set according to the change in the state of the lower plate unit 15 (S4404). That is, the full state of the lower plate unit 15 is determined by the detection signal from the lower plate full tank switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full tank is set and the lower plate is not full. At some time, the setting of the lower plate full tank release state is executed. Further, the setting of the tank sphere-free state or the tank sphere-free state is executed according to the change of the state of the tank sphere (S4405). That is, the tank sphere no state is determined by the detection signal of the tank sphere no switch, the tank sphere no state is set when the tank sphere is no longer present, and the tank sphere no release state is set when the tank sphere is no longer present. Execute the setting. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a notification state, and if there is a notification state, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 notifies this (S4406).

Next, a process for paying out a prize ball is executed by each process of S4407 to S4409. That is, if the prize balls cannot be paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in the process of S4401 is not 0 (S4407: No, S4408: No), the prize ball control process is started (S4409). On the other hand, if the prize balls cannot be paid out (S4407: Yes) or the total number of prize balls is 0 (S4408: Yes), the process for paying out the lent balls is started. The prize ball control processing (S4409) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing for paying out the rental ball in S4410 to S4412, if the payout of the rental ball is not possible and the request for paying out the rental ball from the card unit is received (S4410: No, S4411: Yes), The ball control process (S4412) is started. On the other hand, if the payout of the ball is not possible (S4410: Yes) or if the ball payout request is not received (S4411: No), the subsequent ball removal process is executed (S4413). The ball rental control process (S4412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the ball removing process (S4413), the payout motor 216 is driven and the ball removing process is executed on condition that the state return switch is not checked and the ball removing operation is not started and the ball removing operation is not started (S4413). Then, the control of the vibrator provided on the tank rail (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a clogged state (S4414). Specifically, when a ball clogging occurs near the tank rail, the vibrator is driven to apply vibration to the tank rail to eliminate the ball clogging. After that, the process returns to the beginning of the main payout control process, and thereafter, the processes of S4401 to S4414 described above are repeatedly executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the prize ball control processing described above will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this prize ball payout processing. In the prize ball payout process, first, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is driven at a speed based on the payout command output from the main controller 110, and the prize ball payout is executed (S4501). Next, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4502), and when it is determined that the rotation is not normal (S4502: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to perform the retry process. And the stop process of the payout motor 216 are executed (S4503), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

Further, when it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S4502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game balls are normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch (S4504). When it is determined that the number of gaming balls is not normal (S4504: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the retry process, and the payout motor 216 is stopped (S4505), and the present process is executed. When finished, the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

Further, as a result of the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the number of game balls is normal (S4504: Yes), whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls (ie, It is determined whether or not the payout of the prize balls instructed by the payout command is completed (S4506), and if the payout is completed (S4506: Yes), the stop processing of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4507), This process ends and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82). On the other hand, in the process of S4506, when it is determined that the payout of the prize balls is not completed (S4506: No), the present process is ended and the payout control process (see FIG. 82) is returned to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the ball rental control process described above will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this ball rental control processing. In the ball rental control process, first, the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the ball rental payout (S4601). Next, whether the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor (S4602), and when it is determined that the rotation is not normal (S4602: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the retry process. At the same time, a stopping process of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4603), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

In addition, in the process of S4602, when it is determined that the rotation of the payout motor 216 is normal (S4602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game balls are normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. (S4604). Then, in the process of S4604, when it is determined that the count of the game balls is not normal (S4604: No), the payout motor 216 is driven to execute the retry process, and at the same time, the payout motor 216 is stopped (S1205). ), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the payout control process (see FIG. 82).

Furthermore, in the processing of S4604, when it is determined that the number of gaming balls is normal (S4604: Yes), the number of gaming balls counted by the payout count switch reaches the predetermined number of lent balls (25) and the payout is made. It is determined whether or not it is completed (S4606), and if the payout is completed (S4606: Yes), the stopping process of the payout motor 216 is executed (S4607), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4606, when it is determined that the predetermined number of lent balls (25) has not been paid out (S4606: No), the present process is ended.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is configured such that the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216 that is driven to pay out a prize ball becomes slower as the jackpot round advances. There is. As a result, it is possible to prolong the time when the big hit prize balls are paid out, so that the prize balls can be continuously paid out even after the big hit ends (that is, during the pseudo interval effect). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends. Also, even if the jackpot is not a big hit after the pseudo-interval production, by continuing to pay out the prize balls, it is possible to immerse the player in the aftermath of the previous big hit, and disappointing that the big hit did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is slowed to reduce the number of prize balls that can be paid out per second (that is, it is necessary to pay the prize balls). The time was long), but it is not limited to this. For example, the payout speed may be slowed by increasing the frequency of the payout suspension period. Specifically, for example, a payout suspension period of 1 second is set every time 10 prize balls are paid out in a normal time. However, as the number of jackpots increases, 8 prize balls are paid out. Alternatively, the payout suspension period may be set for each payout of five prize balls. Further, the payout suspension period may be extended as the number of rounds advances.

In the present embodiment, the payout speed is always slow until the third round, and the slowest payout speed is set to "low speed 3" after the third round, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, at the start of each round, a lottery may be executed to determine whether or not the payout speed should be slowed down, and the payout speed may be slowed down randomly. Further, the payout speed may be increased or decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if the “big hit D (15 round big hit)” with a large number of rounds continues, most of the prize balls are paid out at the slowest payout speed (low speed 3). Therefore, even if the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect are finished and the normal variation pattern effect is started, the prize balls may be continuously paid out. In this case, the player may feel anxiety that the payout control of the pachinko machine 10 may be defective. Therefore, for example, in the fifth to twelfth rounds of the “big hit D”, the normal payout speed is restored, and in the thirteenth to the fifteenth rounds, the payout speed is gradually reduced step by step. May be. Further, in a round (for example, 5 rounds or 10 rounds) in the middle of the “big hit D”, the payout speed may be higher than the normal speed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being continuously paid out even after the normal variation pattern effect is started to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem.

In the present embodiment, the payout speed is slowed by the start of each round of jackpots, but the trigger for changing the payout speed is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the payout speed may be changed based on the number of times the ball has won the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. For example, when the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the first to seventh times, the prize ball is paid out at the normal speed, and the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the eighth time. When the ball is won, the payout speed is set to "low speed 1" and the prize balls are paid out. When the ball hits the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a for the ninth time, the payout speed is set to " If the ball is paid out to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a for the 10th time, the payout speed is set to "low speed 3" and the winning ball is paid out. May be configured to perform. As a result, in one round period, the payout speed can be slowed toward the latter half of the period, so that the prize balls can be paid out during the interval period after the end of each round or during the pseudo-interval performance. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends. Also, even if the jackpot is not a big hit after the pseudo-interval production, by continuing to pay out the prize balls, it is possible to immerse the player in the aftermath of the previous big hit, and disappointing that the big hit did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

In addition, the payout speed of the prize balls to be paid out based on the fact that the ball has won the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set to the other winning openings (the first entrance 64, the normal entrance 67, etc.). ) May be slower than the payout speed of the prize balls to be paid out based on the fact that the prize balls have been won, and the prize balls may be continuously paid out even during the special fluctuation period. With such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be directed to the prize ball to be paid out, so that it is more difficult to distinguish the pseudo interval effect from the big hit interval effect. Also, even if the jackpot is not a big hit after the pseudo-interval production, by continuing to pay out the prize balls, it is possible to immerse the player in the aftermath of the previous big hit, and disappointing that the big hit did not continue. The feeling can be reduced. Further, since the payout of the prize balls increases during the big hit, it is possible to suppress excessive heat generation of the payout motor 216 by decreasing the payout speed in the latter half of the big hit.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the payout speed becomes slower as the round progresses uniformly in all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the pre-reading is executed during the big hit and it is determined that the lottery result to be the big hit is held, the payout speed of the prize balls is slowed down, and the prize balls are continuously paid out even during the pseudo interval performance after the big hit. It may be configured as follows. As a result, in the pseudo interval effect executed between the big hit of this time and the next big hit, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls, so that the big hit is once finished. Can be hard to notice. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the contrary, in the pre-reading during the jackpot, if the lottery result to be a jackpot is not held, the payout speed is slowed down as the round progresses, and if it is determined that the lottery result to be a jackpot is held. The payout speed may be set to a normal speed (or a speed faster than normal). If the lottery result which is a big hit is not held during the big hit, the end of the big hit may be notified as a result of the pseudo interval effect. In this case, if the payout speed of the prize balls is slowed down and the prize balls continue to be paid out even after the end of the jackpot is notified, the player can be immersed in the finish of the previous jackpot. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. On the other hand, when the big hit is again made through the pseudo interval effect, a large amount of prize balls are paid out also in the next big hit, so that the time required for paying out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, there is a risk that the payout of prize balls will continue to be executed for a long time after the repetition of the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect (that is, during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern effect), and the pachinko game to the player. There is a risk that the machine 10 may be mistakenly recognized as having a problem. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery result that is a jackpot is held, by setting the payout speed to the normal speed (or a speed higher than the normal speed), the prize is endlessly endowed during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern effect. It is possible to prevent the ball from being continuously dispensed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem.

Further, in the first round of the big hit, the payout speed of the prize balls may be configured to be higher than the normal speed (for example, the speed at which 15 prize balls are paid out per second). As a result, the balls used for the jackpot game can be secured earlier, so it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player loses the balls they have during the jackpot game and cannot play the jackpot game. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game which is a big hit. In addition, when it becomes a big hit via the pseudo interval effect (that is, when it becomes a big hit again in a short period after the last big hit ends), the payout speed for the first round is set to the normal speed, When a new jackpot is hit without passing through the pseudo interval effect, the payout speed may be increased. If you get a jackpot through the pseudo-interval production, the jackpot has been a big hit continuously in a short period from the end of the previous jackpot, so the player has already secured a sufficient number of balls to use for the jackpot game. This is because In addition, if the payout speed is surely increased in the first round, the player can recognize the difference in the payout speed and recognize whether or not the present time is the first round in the jackpot via the pseudo interval effect. There is a risk that it will end up. In the present embodiment, since there is no jackpot of the number of rounds of 2 rounds or less, if it is possible to recognize that the present round is the first round, the continuation of the jackpot is suggested and displayed in at least two subsequent interval effects. I can recognize it. That is, the result of the interval effect for two times can be predicted in advance, so that it becomes impossible to enjoy the interval effect for the two times. On the other hand, when a big hit is generated via the pseudo interval effect, if the payout speed of the first round is set to a normal speed, the player recognizes whether or not it is the first round of a new big hit. Can be difficult to do. Therefore, in each interval effect, it is possible to carefully check whether or not the jackpot continues. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player in every interval effect.

In the present embodiment, the payout command includes the information indicating the number of prize balls and the information indicating the rotation speed of the payout motor 216. However, the payout command becomes information indicating the payout of one prize ball. You may comprise. For example, when paying out 15 prize balls, the payout command may be continuously output 15 times. In addition, the number of payout commands that can be output per second may be decreased (the interval at which the payout commands are output is increased) each time the big hit round progresses. For example, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to output a maximum of 10 payout commands per second, in the second round it is possible to output a maximum of 8 payout commands per second, and in the third round. The payout command may be output six times per second, and the payout command may be output five times per second after the fourth round. This makes it possible to delay the time from the start of the payout of the prize balls to the end thereof, so that the payout of the prize balls can be performed even during the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, since the player's consciousness can be directed to the paid-out prize ball, it is possible to prevent the pseudo interval effect from being watched. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the big hit.

In the present embodiment, the payout command includes the information indicating the number of prize balls and the information indicating the rotation speed of the payout motor 216, but the payout command includes only the information indicating the number of prize balls. The payout control device 111 may be configured to change the rotation speed of the payout motor 216. Specifically, for example, depending on the frequency of payout commands (payout commands corresponding to 15 prize balls) based on the fact that a ball has won a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, is the current round or an interval? The number of rounds may be grasped by discriminating whether or not it is in progress, and the payout speed of the prize balls may be reduced based on the grasped number of rounds. In addition, for example, when the prize ball payout command is continuously output and the payout of the prize ball corresponding to the newly output payout command is put on hold, that is, it is output earlier in time. When the payout of prize balls corresponding to the newly output payout command is stocked because the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the payout command continues, the payout speed is slowed down. You may. Further, in this case, the payout speed may be varied based on the number of stocked unpaid prize balls. For example, when the number of unpaid prize balls is 10, the payout speed may be slower than the normal speed (for example, low speed 1). Further, for example, when the number of unpaid prize balls is 30, the payout speed is set to low speed 2, and when the number of unpaid prize balls is 50, the payout speed is set to low speed 3. It may be configured to set to. As described above, with the configuration that the payout speed is varied by the payout control device 111, the types of payout commands output from the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the processing load of main controller 110 during a big hit can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load of the main control device 110 during the big hit increases, and the closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is delayed, or conversely, the opening timing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is delayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as delay.

Further, a part of the unpaid prize balls stocked in the payout control device 111 may be held until the jackpot is over, and the stocked prize balls may be paid out after the jackpot is over. As a result, the payout of the prize balls can be performed even during the pseudo interval effect, so that the player's consciousness can be directed to the paid prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the pseudo interval effect and the interval effect during the big hit. It should be noted that payout of the stocked prize balls may be started at the time when the jackpot is finished, or may be paid out based on a predetermined trigger. Examples of the predetermined trigger include a timing at which a symbol is fixedly displayed in the variation pattern effect that is first executed after the jackpot is finished, a timing at which the starting prize is first won after the jackpot is finished, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the payout speed is changed for the pachinko machine 10 that performs the pseudo interval effect has been described, but the payout speed may be changed for a gaming machine that does not have the function of the pseudo interval effect. You may comprise. Specifically, the payout speed may be reduced as the number of rounds of the big hit increases, so that the payout of the prize balls continues for a certain period even after the end of the big hit. As a result, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the previous jackpot and to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the period required for paying a prize ball is variable by changing the rotation speed (payout speed) of the payout motor 216. As a result, the jackpot prize balls are continuously paid out even during the pseudo-interval performance, and the player's consciousness is directed toward the prize balls.

On the other hand, in this modification, a signal that causes the pachinko machine 10 to stop and start the supply of balls to the island equipment that supplies the balls to the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be output. Then, in the final stage of the big hit, the ball is controlled so that it is difficult to be supplied from the island facility side, and the prize balls are continuously paid out even during the pseudo interval production after the big hit ends. Thereby, like the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends. Also, even if the jackpot is not a big hit after the pseudo-interval production, by continuing to pay out the prize balls, it is possible to immerse the player in the aftermath of the previous big hit, and disappointing that the big hit did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

The difference between the pachinko machine in this modification and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is that the external output terminal board 261 is electrically connected to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. In the main controller 110, the ROM 202 is provided with a ball supply setting table 202h in place of the payout speed selection table 202g, and the RAM 203 is provided with a supply stop flag 203o, a stop period counter 203p, and a supply period counter 203q. Is added, and a part of the processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is different. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the fifth embodiment. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification. As shown in FIG. 85, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, an external output terminal 261 is provided in addition to the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment. The external output terminal 261 is electrically connected to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, and is used to output various information regarding the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. Here, various information about the pachinko machine 10 is information indicating whether or not the gaming machine is in a big hit, information regarding whether or not the special symbol is changing, information indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out, and a ball. Information that indicates whether or not the supply of water is necessary. These pieces of information are output to the island facility, hall computer, etc. through the external output terminal 261.

The hall computer is configured to be able to ascertain the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 and determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is fraudulent based on the information output via the external output terminal 261. In addition, the island facility supplies the ball to the pachinko machine 10 or stops the ball supply based on the information output via the external output terminal 261. The pachinko machine 10 itself is also provided with a tank for storing balls, but since the number of balls that can be stored is small (for example, 150), the jackpot starts when the tank is full. Even if it is done, the balls stored in the tank are exhausted during the big hit. Therefore, at least in the middle of the big hit, all the prize balls in the big hit can be paid out by receiving the additional balls supplied from the island facility.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86(a), the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 86A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 86(a), the ROM 202 in the present modification example is provided with a ball supply setting table 202h instead of the payout speed selection table 202g defined in the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 87, the sphere supply setting table 202h is a data table referred to for setting the state of supply of spheres from the island facility in each round of the jackpot. By referring to the ball supply setting table 202h, the payout speed of the prize balls can be made slower in the latter half round of the big hit. Therefore, since the payout of the prize balls during the jackpot is continued even after the jackpot is over (that is, during the pseudo interval effect), the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends.

FIG. 86( b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification. As shown in FIG. 86(b), the RAM 203 in the present modification example is provided with a supply stop flag 203o, a stop period counter 203p, and a supply period counter 203q in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment. ..

The supply stop flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the supply of balls from the island equipment is stopped. If the supply stop flag 203o is off, the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped. Indicates that. The supply stop flag 203o is switched on and off at a time interval determined for each jackpot round. It is also set to on at the start of the jackpot.

The stop period counter 203p is a counter that counts the stop period when the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped. In this modification, the supply stopped state is maintained (that is, supply permission is not set) for one second after the supply of the sphere is instructed. The stop period counter 203p is set to an initial value (250) at a time interval determined for each big jackpot round, and is decremented by 1 every time the main processing (see FIG. 88) is performed until the value becomes 0. Is configured.

The supply period counter 203q is a counter that counts the permission period when the island equipment is permitted to supply spheres. The present modification is configured to permit the supply of balls for a predetermined time period for each round after the jackpot round is started or after the stop of the supply of balls is released. The supply period counter 203q is set to a value corresponding to the time defined in the sphere supply setting table 202h (see FIG. 87) described above as an initial value every time the supply of the sphere is permitted.

Next, the sphere supply setting table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the sphere supply setting table 202h is a data table for setting the frequency of stopping the supply of spheres from the island equipment in each round of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 87, in the sphere supply setting table 202h, the frequency of stopping the supply of spheres is defined in association with the value of the payout counter 203n (that is, in association with the number of rounds per jackpot).

Specifically, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, the first round), the island facility is not instructed to stop the ball supply. Therefore, the balls stored in the tank of the pachinko machine 10 are preferentially paid out. Further, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 1 (that is, the second round), the ball supply to the island equipment is stopped once every 10 seconds. More specifically, the supply of spheres is permitted for 9 seconds from the start of the second round, and the supply of spheres is stopped for 9 seconds to 10 seconds. After that, the supply permission state for 9 seconds and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. In this state, the amount of balls supplied from the island facility is set so that the actual payout is delayed with respect to the prize ball payout request.

When the value of the payout counter 203n is 2 (that is, the third round), the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped once every 5 seconds. More specifically, the supply of the sphere is permitted for 4 seconds from the start of the third round, and the supply of the sphere is stopped for 4 seconds to 5 seconds. Then, thereafter, the supply permission state for 4 seconds and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of the round. Further, when the value of the payout counter 203n is 3 to 14 (that is, the 4th to 15th rounds), the supply of balls to the island equipment is stopped once every 2 seconds. More specifically, the supply of spheres is permitted for 1 second from the start of each round, and the supply of spheres is stopped for 1 second to 2 seconds. After that, the supply permission state for 1 second and the supply stop state for 1 second are repeated until the end of each round.

By setting the supply permission state and the supply stop state with reference to the payout counter 203n, it is possible to increase the frequency of stopping the ball supply to the island equipment as the number of rounds of the jackpot increases. it can. That is, a situation in which there are not enough balls for payout easily occurs, and the payout of prize balls can be easily interrupted. Therefore, as the jackpot round progresses, it is possible to extend the period from the start of payout of prize balls to the completion of payout, so the prize balls are paid even after the jackpot is over (that is, during the pseudo interval performance). You can keep it out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect by directing the player's consciousness to paying out the prize balls during the pseudo-interval effect. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the pseudo interval effect after the end.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, various processes executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 in the modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present modification. As described above, this main processing is processing for executing main control of the game at a 4 ms cycle.

In this main process, each process of S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 is the same as each process of S1101 to S1103, S1105 to S1116, and S1142 in the main process (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment. The process of is executed. Then, in the main processing in this modified example, a ball supply setting processing (S1151) is executed instead of the payout command setting processing (see FIG. 79) in the fifth embodiment. This ball supply setting process is a process for setting the supply of balls to the island facility or the stop of the supply of balls in each round of the jackpot. The details of the sphere supply setting process (S1151) will be described with reference to the subsequent FIG. 89.

Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the above-mentioned sphere supply setting process will be described. As described above, this sphere supply setting process is a process for setting the supply of spheres to the island facility or the stop of the supply of spheres in each big round. The instruction content for the island equipment set in the sphere supply setting process is output to the island equipment via the external output terminal board 261.

In the sphere supply setting process (see FIG. 89), first, it is determined whether or not the present is a big hit (S4701), and if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S4701: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, when it is determined that the jackpot is currently in progress (S4701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (that is, the first round of the jackpot). (S4702). Then, if it is determined that the value of the payout counter 203n is 0 (S4702: Yes), it is not necessary to set the stop of the ball supply to the island facility, and thus the present process is ended.

When it is determined in the process of S4702 that the value of the payout counter 203n is not 0 (that is, 1 to 14), it is then determined whether or not the supply stop flag is on (S4703). If it is determined that the supply stop flag is on (S4703), it means that the supply of the balls from the island equipment is stopped, and thus the value of the stop period counter 203p is subtracted by 1, The value is updated (S4704), and it is determined whether or not the value of the updated stop period counter 203p is 0 (that is, whether the period for stopping the supply of balls from the island facility has elapsed) (S4705).

In the processing of S4705, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203p is not 0, it means that one second, which is the period of stopping the supply of the balls from the island equipment, has not elapsed, and thus this process is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S4705, when it is determined that the value of the stop period counter 203p is 0, the supply permission is set to restart the supply of the balls to the island equipment (S4706). Next, with reference to the value of the payout counter 203n and the sphere supply setting table 202h, an initial value is set in the supply period counter 203q (S4707). Then, the supply stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S4708), and this processing ends. The initial value set in the supply period counter 203q is a value corresponding to the permission period defined in the sphere supply setting table 202h. For example, if the value of the payout counter 203n is 1, the permission period is 9 seconds, so 2250, which is the counter value corresponding to 9 seconds, is set.

In the process of S4703, when it is determined that the supply stop flag 203o is off (S4703: No), it indicates that the island facility is currently allowed to supply the sphere. Therefore, the supply period counter The value is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of 203q (S4709), and the value of the updated supply period counter 203q is 0 (that is, whether the period for permitting the supply of balls from the island facility has elapsed). It is determined whether or not (S4710).

In the process of S4710, if it is determined that the value of the supply period counter 203q is not 0 (S4710: No), it means that the period for permitting the island equipment to supply the ball has not elapsed, and thus the book is left as it is. The process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4710, when it is determined that the value of the supply period counter 203q is 0 (S4710: Yes), supply stop for setting the supply of the balls to the island equipment is set (S4711). Next, the value of the stop period counter 203p is set to 250 (1 second/4 ms), which is a value corresponding to 1 second (S4712), the supply stop flag 203o is set to ON (S4713), and this processing ends. To do.

The sphere supply permission or the supply stop set by the sphere supply setting process (see FIG. 89) is output to the island facility via the external output terminal 261. The island facility supplies spheres based on an instruction from each pachinko machine 10 electrically connected via the external output terminal 261.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example is configured such that as the jackpot round advances, the frequency of stopping the ball supply to the island facility for supplying the ball increases. That is, the situation in which there are not enough balls for payout easily occurs, and the payout of prize balls is easily interrupted. Therefore, as the jackpot round progresses, it is possible to extend the period from the start of payout of prize balls to the completion of payout, so the prize balls are paid even after the jackpot is over (that is, during the pseudo interval performance). You can keep it out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo-interval effect by directing the player's consciousness to paying out the prize balls during the pseudo-interval effect. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the pseudo interval effect after the end.

In this modification, the payout period of the prize balls is varied by changing the frequency of the supply stop of the balls, but the payout period of the prize balls is changed by changing the supply stop period of the balls. It may be configured as follows. For example, as the round progresses, the sphere supply suspension period may be increased by 1 second. As a result, similarly to the present modification, the payout period of the prize balls can be extended as the latter half of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to continue paying out the prize balls even during the pseudo-interval production, so that the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends.

In this modification, the supply frequency of spheres is increased in each round up to the third round, and the supply frequency of spheres is set to be the highest in the third and subsequent rounds. It is not something that can be done. For example, at the start of each round, a lottery for increasing or decreasing the supply stop frequency of balls may be performed, and the supply stop frequency may be randomly changed. Further, the supply stop frequency of balls may be increased or decreased according to the number of rounds. For example, if the “big hit D (15 round big hit)” with a large number of rounds continues, most of the prize balls are paid out in a state where the supply frequency of the balls is the highest. Therefore, even if the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect are finished and the normal variation pattern effect is started, the prize balls may be continuously paid out. In this case, the player may feel anxiety that the payout control of the pachinko machine 10 may be defective. Therefore, for example, in the fifth to twelfth rounds of "big hit D", the sphere supply is not stopped, and in the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds, the sphere supply stop frequency is increased step by step again. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the award balls from being continuously paid out even after the normal variation pattern effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem.

In the present embodiment, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is increased at the start of each round of jackpots, but the time at which the frequency of stopping supply of balls is varied is not limited to this. For example, in each round, the supply stop frequency of the balls may be changed based on the number of times the balls have won the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. For example, when the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the first to seventh times, the supply of the ball is not set to be stopped, and in the eighth ball the specific winning opening (large opening) ) When winning the 65a, the supply of the ball is set once every 10 seconds, and when the ball wins the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a at the 9th time, it is set to 1 every 5 seconds. Suspension of ball supply is set at a frequency of 10 times, and if a ball wins the special winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a at the 10th time, supply of balls is set at a frequency of once every 2 seconds. You may comprise. As a result, in one round period, the supply of balls is frequently stopped in the latter half of the period. Therefore, since the payout speed becomes slower, the prize balls can be paid out during the interval period after the end of each round or even during the pseudo interval effect. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls during the pseudo interval production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from concentrating on the pseudo interval effect, and it is difficult to distinguish between the interval effect executed during the big hit and the pseudo interval effect after the big hit ends. Also, even if the jackpot is not a big hit after the pseudo-interval production, by continuing to pay out the prize balls, it is possible to immerse the player in the aftermath of the previous big hit, and disappointing that the big hit did not continue. The feeling can be reduced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the supply of the balls is stopped more frequently as the round progresses in all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if you pre-read during a big hit and determine that the lottery result that is a big hit is pending, increase the frequency of stopping the supply of balls and pay out prize balls even during the pseudo interval production after the big hit. It may be configured to continue. As a result, in the pseudo interval effect executed between the big hit of this time and the next big hit, the player's consciousness can be directed to the payout of the prize balls, so that the big hit is once finished. Can be hard to notice. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. On the contrary, in the pre-reading during the big hit, while the lottery result to be a big hit is not held, the frequency of ball supply stop is increased with each round, and the lottery result to be a big hit is held. When the determination is made, the supply of the balls may not be stopped. If the lottery result which is a big hit is not held during the big hit, the end of the big hit may be notified as a result of the pseudo interval effect. In this case, by increasing the frequency of stopping the supply of balls, the payout speed of the prize balls can be slowed down, and if the prize balls continue to be paid out even after the end of the jackpot is informed, You can immerse yourself in the afterglow of the previous jackpot, and reduce the disappointment that the jackpot did not continue. On the other hand, when the big hit is again made through the pseudo interval effect, a large amount of prize balls are paid out also in the next big hit, so that the time required for paying out the prize balls may be prolonged. In other words, there is a risk that the payout of prize balls will continue to be executed for a long time after the repetition of the jackpot and the pseudo-interval effect (that is, during the execution of the normal fluctuation pattern effect), and the pachinko game to the player. There is a risk that the machine 10 may be mistakenly recognized as having a problem. Therefore, when it is determined that the lottery result which is a big hit is held, by configuring so that the supply stop of the ball is not set, the payout of the prize ball is executed endlessly during the execution of the normal variation pattern production. You can keep going. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the pachinko machine 10 has a problem.

In this modification, the various processes performed by the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 are configured to execute the same process as the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, but, for example, the tank has no balls. In this case, the retry process may not be performed. In this modification, the amount of balls supplied from the island facility is adjusted so that the number of balls to be paid out is intentionally short. That is why.

In this modification, when the balls to be paid out are supplied from the island facility, the prize balls are sequentially paid out. You may comprise. For example, payout may be suspended until a total of 150 balls are supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and prize balls may be collectively paid out when 150 balls are supplied. As a result, the payout can be added into the intonation, so that the player can be entertained. Further, the suspended payout may be paid out based on a predetermined trigger. Examples of the predetermined trigger include a timing at which a symbol is fixedly displayed in the variation pattern effect that is first executed after the jackpot is finished, a timing at which the starting prize is first won after the jackpot is finished, and the like.

In addition, in the present modification, an example in which the frequency of stopping the supply of balls is changed for the pachinko machine 10 that performs the pseudo interval effect has been described. The supply stop frequency may be changed. Specifically, as the number of rounds for the jackpot increases, the frequency of stopping the supply of balls may be increased so that the payout of the prize balls continues for a certain period even after the jackpot is over. As a result, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the previous jackpot and to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91. In this modification, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, when a prize information command is received, it is determined whether the variation is a variation that is executed over a special variation period, and if it is a variation that exceeds the special variation period, it is determined whether the special effect is executed. To be executed. In the special effect, the effect that prompts the user to press the button shown in FIG. 20A is displayed.

First, with reference to FIG. 90, the command determination processing in the present modification will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the command determination process of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification. Of the command determination processing, in each processing of S1601 to S1608 and each processing of S1610 to S1620, each of the processing of S1601 to S1608 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment and each of S1610 to S1620. The same processing as each processing is executed. In the command determination process (see FIG. 90) of this modification, when it is determined that the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1608), the prefetch time setting process is then executed (S1650), and the book is read. The process ends. The prefetch time setting process will be described with reference to the subsequent FIG.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the prefetch time setting process (S1650) executed in the process of S1650 of the command determination process (FIG. 90). In the prefetch time setting process (FIG. 91, S1650), first, the variation time of the variation pattern effect is calculated based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110, and the calculated variation time is transferred to the winning information storage area 223a. It is stored (S1651). Then, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern effect continues for a period equal to or longer than the period set as the special variation period (S1652), and when it is determined to end within the special variation period (S1652: No), it is as it is. This process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation exceeds the special variation period (S1652: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result indicated by the received winning command is a big hit (S1653). When it is determined that the result is the jackpot lottery result (S1653: Yes), the door effect is set for each change up to the jackpot change (S1654). Specifically, the effect that the boy discovers a new door is set every time the variation is executed. In addition, the door to be discovered may be provided with a plurality of modes, for example, when the jackpot is continued, a luxurious golden door is configured to be easy to find, and when the jackpot is not continued, a simple tree is used. The door may be easily found.

When the process of S1654 ends, then, a continuous hitting effect, which is an effect in which the door is opened by executing the depression of the frame button 22, is set from the variation pattern effect before the variation that is a jackpot to the variation pattern effect that is a jackpot. (S1655). Then, this process is completed.

Here, by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22, the door is opened, and an effect that makes the player think that the jackpot game is continuing is executed.

In addition, in the processing of S1653, when it is determined that the result is a missed lottery result (S1653: No), the effect counter (one of 0 to 198) is acquired (S1656), and the special effect lottery is executed. (S1657). In the special effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired effect counter is 0 to 39.

When it is determined that the special effect lottery is won (S1657: Yes), the period until the fluctuation of the effect corresponding to the received winning command is ended is set, and the door effect is set (S1658). Here, an effect in which the doors continuously appear is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol that is established before the reserved ball that is won in the special effect lottery. Then, an effect that suggests the occurrence of a continuous hit effect that prompts the user to press the frame button 22 over a plurality of fluctuations (preliminary notice effect for starting continuous hits) is set (S1658). Then, this process is completed.

In this way, since the effect is executed in a period spanning a plurality of fluctuations depending on the result of the prefetching, it is possible to make the boundary of the fluctuations difficult for the player to understand even if the fluctuations actually cross a plurality of fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol is changed in the effect of the special change period, and to make the player think that the plurality of jackpots are one jackpot effect. ..

As described above, in the present modification, when the special effect period is exceeded, the lottery is executed to determine whether or not the continuous hit effect, which is the special effect, is executed. Furthermore, if the result of the hit determination is a win, the special effect is forcibly set, so the player expects that if the special effect is displayed, the jackpot will continue, he/she expects to play the game. It can be carried out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game. In addition, by executing the prefetching process, the special effect period can be set based on the lottery result before the start of variation, and the effect of continuing the jackpot game can be executed.

Therefore, the player can feel as if the jackpot period has continued for a long time, and can enjoy the enjoyment of the game. Further, in the present embodiment, the door effect is set for a plurality of fluctuations, so that the door effect is set a plurality of times in succession, so that the player is expected to continue the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect such as counting down the period until the continuous hit effect is started may be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect of opening the door (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)) is performed for each jackpot interval period. However, the effect of opening the door (see FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b)) ) You may comprise so that the interval period to perform and the interval period to perform the effect different from the effect which opens a door may be provided. That is, the effect different from the pseudo interval effect may be executed during the interval period. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize that the jackpot is in the interval when the effect of a different mode is generated. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the next round will be started after the end of the effect before the end of the effect, so that the player can be reassured that the jackpot continues.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the pseudo interval effect is performed in the total period of the special fluctuation period after the jackpot is over and the opening period of the jackpot won during the special fluctuation period, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the opening period for the jackpot may not be provided, and the pseudo interval effect may be completed during the special variation period after the jackpot ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the effect period of the big hit interval effect and the pseudo interval effect, so that it is possible to shorten the interval between rounds. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of increase of the prize balls to be acquired. Further, the opening period may be provided only for the jackpot that is won without passing through the pseudo interval effect, and the opening period may not be provided for the jackpot that is won through through the pseudo interval effect. As a result, with the jackpot that is won first, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the jackpot will start due to the opening effect that is performed during the opening period. Alternatively, the opening period and the ending period may be provided for the jackpot, and the pseudo interval effect may be executed during these periods. Moreover, you may comprise so that these periods may be changed according to the content of pseudo interval production, etc. With this, the effect period can be set according to the content of the pseudo interval effect, and the like, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the difference between the effect period and the effect content. it can.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of rounds is displayed during the big hit, but the number of rounds may not be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand how many remaining rounds of jackpots will be awarded, so while making the player feel that they do not know how long the jackpot will continue, A game can be played. Further, in this case, when the end display of the pseudo interval effect is performed, the total number of rounds that the player has consumed while the jackpot and the pseudo interval effect are repeated may be displayed. With such a configuration, the player can be made aware of the number of rounds that have been exhausted, so if a large number of rounds is displayed, the player can be satisfied and the number of small rounds can be reduced. If displayed, in the next big hit game, the game can be played with the goal of obtaining a larger number of rounds.

Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the jackpot expected value until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine that is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and winning a ball in the special area as a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

A specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is not provided with a handle for ball launch. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, for example due to the operation of the stop switch, or the predetermined amount. By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of medals and balls.

A pachinko machine in which some or all of the above-described embodiments are combined may be used.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In the following, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Adjust the period of the pseudo interval effect after the jackpot is over to the interval effect during jackpot)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, and a predetermined ball entry Opening and closing which sets in the privilege game state of 1 a ball entrance for giving a valuable value and an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is restricted as the state of the ball entrance A setting means, a closed period setting means for setting a closed period which is a period for closing the state of the entrance by the opening/closing setting means, and a dynamic display of identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. It comprises a dynamic display executing means for executing, and an execution period setting means for setting an execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means, wherein the execution period setting means is the privilege game state. When the dynamic display of the identification information that is the specific lottery result is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the, the period of the same length as the closed period has elapsed after the privilege game state has ended. The gaming machine A1 is capable of setting the execution period so that the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the time.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means for performing the predetermined lottery, the state is shifted to the privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means. A predetermined value is added by the ball entering the entrance, and the state of the entrance is opened or closed to allow the ball to enter or closed to restrict the entrance of the ball. The closing period is set by the setting unit in the one privilege game state, and the closing period setting unit sets the closed period, which is a period in which the state of the entrance is closed. The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means. Then, in the case where the dynamic display of the identification information that is the specific lottery result is executed during a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends, a period having the same length as the closed period after the privilege gaming state ends. The execution period is set by the execution period setting means so that the dynamic display of the identification information ends before the elapse.

Thereby, when the specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the privilege gaming state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privilege game state continues for a longer period of time, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

The game machine A2 is provided with a suggestion effect execution means for executing a closed period suggestion effect that suggests that the game machine A1 is the closed period in the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, a closed period suggesting effect that suggests a closed period in a predetermined period is executed by the suggesting effect executing means, so after the privilege game state ends. For a predetermined period of time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the bonus game state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privilege game state continues for a longer period of time, so that there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A2, when the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined period, the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information previously set in the predetermined period is performed. A gaming machine A3, which sets an execution period having a length equal to or less than the period.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the identification information previously set in the predetermined period is set. Since the execution period whose length is less than or equal to the execution period of the dynamic display is set, the dynamic display of the identification information of the execution period which is shorter in the latter half of the predetermined period is executed. Therefore, since more predetermined lottery is executed in the latter half of the predetermined period, if a specific lottery result is obtained within the predetermined period and the special game state is entered, the latter half of the predetermined period is entered. It will be easier. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the time until the next privilege game state is started to vary, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the privilege game state has ended.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information within the predetermined period up to a predetermined number of times, and the dynamic display of the identification information of the predetermined number of times. Of the above, when performing the final dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is terminated based on the lapse of a period having the same length as the closed period. A game machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effect is produced. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution setting means within a predetermined period up to a predetermined number of times. Further, among the dynamic display of the identification information of a predetermined number of times, when the dynamic display of the last identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means, a period of the same length as the closed period elapses. The dynamic display of the identification information is ended.

As a result, the period during which the closed period suggestive effect is executed is set to be the same length as the closed period, so it is the closed period, or the closed game suggestive effect is executed when the privilege game state ends. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate whether or not it is being played. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privilege game state is still in effect even after the privilege game state has ended, and thus it is possible to make the player feel that the privilege game state continues for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A4, when the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result in the predetermined period, for the period having the same length as the closed period. A gaming machine A5, wherein the remaining period is set as an execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is set by the execution period setting means in the predetermined period, the closed period becomes the closed period. Since the remaining period for the period of the same length is set as the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information, whether it is the closed period or the special gaming state regardless of whether a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined period. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the closing period suggesting effect is being executed after completion of the above. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privilege game state is still in effect even after the privilege game state has ended, and thus it is possible to make the player feel that the privilege game state continues for a long time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In either the gaming machine A4 or A5, the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the predetermined period based on the remaining number of times relative to the predetermined number. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine A4 or A5, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in a predetermined period, the remaining for a predetermined number of times Since the execution period of the dynamic display is set based on the number of times, it is possible to prevent the length of the closed period suggestive effect from varying. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether it is the closed period or whether the special game state is finished and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, when the execution period setting means sets the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information in the same period as the closed period, the execution period setting unit has the same length as the closed period. The gaming machine A7, which is set based on the remaining time until the period of.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, when the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information is set by the execution period setting means in the period having the same length as the closed period. Since the execution period is set based on the remaining time until the period having the same length as the closed period elapses, the length of the closed period suggestive effect can be made less likely to vary. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether it is the closed period or whether the special game state is finished and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the closed period setting means selects one period from a plurality of periods having different lengths and sets it as the closed period.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, one period is selected from a plurality of periods having different lengths and set as the closed period by the closed period setting means. The length can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether it is the closed period or whether the special game state is finished and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, when the specific lottery result is not obtained in the lottery executed by the lottery means by the end of a period having the same length as the closed period of 1, the privilege game A gaming machine A9, characterized by comprising an end notifying means for notifying that the state has ended.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, if the lottery executed by the lottery means before the end of the period having the same length as the closed period of 1 has a specific lottery result. If not, the end notification means notifies the end of the privilege game state, so that the player can be informed that the privilege game state has ended.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the dynamic display execution means displays the identification information in the line of sight of the player when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a period having the same length as the closed period. A gaming machine A10, which is dynamically displayed at a position off the center.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means during the period having the same length as the closed period, the identification is performed. Since the time-wise information is dynamically displayed at a position where the information deviates from the center of the player's line of sight, it can be difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether it is the closed period or whether the special game state is finished and the closed period suggesting effect is being executed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the privilege game state has a plurality of types in which the number of times of the open state set by the opening/closing setting means is different from each other, and the privilege game transition means is the lottery. A gaming machine A11, wherein one type is selected from the plurality of types of privilege game states and set when a specific lottery result is obtained by the means.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are produced. That is, the privilege game state has a plurality of types in which the number of open states set by the opening/closing setting means is different from each other. When a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, one type is selected and set by the privilege game transition means from a plurality of types of privilege game states.

This makes it difficult to predict how many times the open state will be set in the privilege game state. Therefore, when the open state is set a plurality of times, the open state is set a plurality of times in one privilege game state, or the open state is set a plurality of times due to continuous transition to the privilege game state of a plurality of times. It can be difficult to distinguish whether it is set. Therefore, it is possible to execute the game while expecting that the open state is set to a large number, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Feature B group> (Perform the same effect as the interval effect after the big hit)
An effect execution means for executing an effect, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game transition means for changing the state to a privilege game state advantageous to a player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. , A ball is given a predetermined value by entering it, and the state of the ball entrance is an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is restricted from entering. 1. The opening and closing setting means for setting in the privilege game state of 1 and the closing period setting means for setting a closing period which is a period during which the opening and closing setting means brings the state of the entrance into the closed state, The means displays the same image as the closed period image which is the image displayed in the production executed in the closed period, in the production executed in the predetermined period after the privilege game state ends. A gaming machine B1.

The gaming machine B1 has the following effects. That is, the production is executed by the production executing means. Further, when the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state advantageous to the player. A predetermined value is added by the ball entering the entrance, and the state of the entrance is opened or closed to allow the ball to enter or closed to restrict the entrance of the ball. The closing period is set by the setting unit in the one privilege game state, and the closing period setting unit sets the closed period, which is a period in which the state of the entrance is closed. In the effect executed by the effect executing means in the predetermined period after the privilege game state is finished, the same image as the closed period image displayed in the effect executed in the closed period is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to make the user feel as if the privilege gaming state continues during a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the privilege game state that is advantageous to the player continues for a longer period of time, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the privilege game state has a plurality of types in which the number of times of the open state set by the opening/closing setting unit is different from each other, and the privilege game transition unit is specified by the lottery unit. A gaming machine B2, wherein one type is selected and set from the plurality of types of the privilege game states when a lottery result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the privilege gaming state has a plurality of types in which the number of open states set by the opening/closing setting means is different from each other, and a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. When it becomes, one type is selected and set from the plurality of types of privilege game states by the privilege game transition means. Therefore, when the privilege game state is set, the number of open states to be set is predicted. Can be difficult. Further, since the closed period image is displayed in the predetermined period, when the open period is set a plurality of times, whether the privilege period is one of the privilege game state, or a specific lottery result in the predetermined period, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the open period has been set a plurality of times as a result of shifting to the game state a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in the bonus game state while expecting that a large number of open periods will be set, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a period discriminating unit that discriminates whether or not a period having the same length as the closed period has passed after the privilege game state has ended, and the period discriminating unit determines the same period as the closed period. A game machine B3, comprising: an end suggestion effect executing means for executing an end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privilege game state when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is determined by the period determining means whether or not a period of the same length as the closed period has passed after the privilege gaming state has ended, and the closed period When it is determined that the period of the same length as has elapsed, the end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privilege game state is executed by the end suggestion effect executing means, so that the privilege game state has ended for the player. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the closing period image is displayed by the effect executing unit, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing unit is the closing period image. A gaming machine B4, which is executed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize as compared to.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the closed period image is displayed by the effect executing means, the dynamic identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is displayed. Since the display is performed in a mode that is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the closed period image, it may be difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the privilege game state ends. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine B4, display means capable of displaying, on the display screen, one or both of the front closed period image displayed by the effect executing means and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means. When the closed period image and the dynamic display of the identification information are displayed on the display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrow range as compared with the closed period image. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the following effects are produced. That is, one or both of the closed period image displayed by the effect executing means and the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means are displayed on the display screen by the display means. Then, when the closed period image and the dynamic display of the identification information are displayed on the display means, the dynamic display of the identification information is displayed in a narrower range than the closed period image.

This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the bonus game state ends.

In the gaming machine B4, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the closed period image is displayed by the effect execution means is a mode in which the identification information is translucent. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being displayed with.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, when the pseudo-rest suggestion effect is performed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display executing means results in half the identification information. Since it is displayed in a transparent manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the closed period and the predetermined period after the bonus game state ends.

Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6 is provided with a pseudo dynamic display executing means that pseudo-dynamically displays the identification information during the provision suspension period.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the pseudo dynamic display of pseudo identification information is executed by the pseudo dynamic display executing means in the closed period. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a predetermined period after the bonus game state is finished.

<Characteristic C group> (Determine the display mode of the pseudo interval effect based on the look-ahead result)
An effect execution means for executing an effect, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game transition means for changing the state to a privilege game state advantageous to a player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. , A ball is given a predetermined value by entering it, and the state of the ball entrance is an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is restricted from entering. Opening/closing setting means set in the privilege game state of No. 1, closed period setting means for setting a closed period which is a period during which the state of the entrance is closed by the opening/closing setting means, and lottery by the lottery means Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the result, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and stored in the storage means And a preliminary lottery means for executing the predetermined lottery in advance before the lottery conditions are satisfied by using the information, and the effect execution means, in a predetermined period after the privilege game state is finished, In order to execute a closed period suggestive effect that is an effect that suggests that it is a closed period, when the specific lottery result is obtained by the preliminary lottery means, of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that at least the closed period suggesting effect is executed until the execution of the dynamic display is completed.

The gaming machine C1 has the following effects. That is, the production is executed by the production executing means. A predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, using the information obtained by the obtaining means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. When the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the state is shifted to the privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means. A predetermined value is added by the ball entering the entrance, and the state of the entrance is opened or closed to allow the ball to enter or closed to restrict the entrance of the ball. The closing period is set by the setting unit in the one privilege game state, and the closing period setting unit sets the closed period, which is a period in which the state of the entrance is closed. Dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the lottery result by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means until the lottery conditions are satisfied. A predetermined lottery is executed in advance by the advance lottery means before the lottery conditions are established using the information stored in the storage means. Here, in the effect executing means, the closed period suggesting effect, which is an effect suggesting that it is the closing period, is executed in a predetermined period after the privilege game state is finished, and the specific lottery result is obtained by the preliminary lottery means. In this case, at least the closed period suggestive effect is executed until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result is completed.

As a result, the closed period suggesting effect is executed during the period from the end of the privilege game state to the start of the next privilege game state based on the information indicating the specific lottery result stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to make the user feel as if one privilege game state continues without the privilege game state ending. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel as if the privilege game state, which is advantageous to the player, continues for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, in the predetermined period, the effect determination unit determines that the information determination unit determines that the information stored in the storage unit includes information that is a predetermined lottery result. Based on the above, when the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period is exceeded by the dynamic display execution means, the closed period suggestive effect is extended until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. A gaming machine C2, characterized in that the gaming machine C2 is provided with an effect extending means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, it is determined that the information stored in the storage means by the information determination means has information that is a predetermined lottery result during a predetermined period, and the information is determined. When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after the predetermined period is exceeded by the dynamic display execution means based on the Therefore, if the length of the pause suggestion effect is longer than the predetermined period, it is possible to make the player recognize that the privilege game state may continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more entertained with the suggestion of pause.

In the gaming machine C2, during the predetermined period, the information determining unit determines that the information stored in the storage unit includes information that is a predetermined lottery result, and based on the information, the dynamic determination is performed. When a dynamic display of the identification information is performed after the predetermined period has been exceeded by the display execution means, a period determination means for determining in advance a period until the dynamic display of the identification information ends is provided, The effect execution means sets the content of the closed period suggestion effect extended by the effect extension means, based on the period determined by the period determination means.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, during the predetermined period, the information discriminating unit determines that the information stored in the storage unit includes the information that is the predetermined lottery result, and based on the information, the dynamic display executing unit exceeds the predetermined period. When the dynamic display of the identification information is executed after that, the period from the dynamic display of the identification information to the end is determined in advance by the period determining means. Then, based on the period determined by the period determining unit, the content of the closed period suggestive effect extended by the effect extending unit is set by the effect executing unit.

As a result, the content of the closed period suggesting effect extended by the effect extending means can be changed to the content according to the period until the dynamic display of the identification information is completed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort because the closed period suggesting effect and the start of the special game state are deviated from each other.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, a period discriminating unit for discriminating whether or not the predetermined period has passed after the privilege gaming state is finished, and the effect execution unit is provided with the predetermined period by the period discriminating unit. The gaming machine C4, which is provided with an end suggestion effect executing means for executing an end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privilege game state when it is determined that has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the period determining means whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed after the privilege gaming state has ended. Further, in the effect execution means, the end suggestion effect execution means executes the end suggestion effect suggesting the end of the privilege game state when the period determination means determines that the predetermined period has elapsed.

This has the effect that the player can clearly recognize whether or not the privilege game state has ended.

In the gaming machine C4, the effect extension means dynamically operates the identification information to be executed based on the predetermined lottery result information after the end suggestion effect executed by the end suggestion effect execution means ends. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that the closed period suggesting effect is executed until the display is completed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the identification information executed based on the predetermined lottery result information after the completion of the suggestion completion effect executed by the suggestion completion effect executing means is completed. Since the closed period suggestive effect is executed by the effect extension means until the dynamic display is ended, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is still a possibility of being in the privilege game state even if the end suggestive effect is ended. it can. Therefore, even if the end suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation regarding the privilege game state, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In the gaming machine C5, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the closed period suggesting effect is executed by the effect executing means is compared with the closed period suggesting effect. A gaming machine C6, which is executed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means is performed when the closed period suggesting effect is being executed by the effect executing means. Since it is executed in a manner that is more difficult to visually recognize than the period suggesting effect, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the period in which the closed period suggesting effect is being executed and the closed period in the privilege game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in whether or not the privilege game state is set after the closed period suggesting effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (The effect is shortened when the firing stop is detected)
An effect executing means for executing an effect, a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and a privilege game transition means for changing the state to a privilege game state advantageous to a player when a specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means. , A ball is given a predetermined value by entering it, and the state of the ball entrance is an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is restricted from entering. 1. Opening/closing setting means set in the privilege game state of 1, and closing period setting means for setting a closing period which is a period during which the opening/closing setting means brings the state of the entrance into the closed state, and operation by the player Based on a launching means for launching a ball based on the launching means, and an operation determining means for determining the content of the operation on the launching means, the effect executing means is configured to close the closing for a predetermined period after the privilege game state is finished. It is to perform a closed period suggestive effect that is an effect that suggests that it is a period, and an effect variable that changes the content of the closed period suggestive effect when it is determined by the operation determination means that the result is a predetermined determination result. A gaming machine D1 comprising means.

The gaming machine D1 has the following effects. That is, when the effect is executed by the effect execution means and the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the privilege game transition means shifts to the privilege game state advantageous to the player. Then, a predetermined value is added by the ball entering the entrance, and the state of the entrance is an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted. Is set in the privilege game state of 1 by the opening/closing setting means, and the closing period setting means sets a closed period which is a period in which the state of the entrance is closed by the opening/closing setting means. Based on the operation by the player, the operation determining means determines the content of the operation on the launching means that launches the ball. In the effect executing means, after the privilege game state is finished, a closed period suggesting effect which is an effect suggesting that it is a closed period is executed, and when the operation determining means determines that the result is a predetermined determination result, it is pseudo. The contents of the pause suggestion effect are changed by the effect changing means.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the player's operation on the launching means can be executed, so that the closed period suggesting effect can be varied according to the player's taste. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine D1, the effect changing means changes the content of the closed period suggesting effect to a content that suggests the end of the privilege game state, wherein the effect changing means is characterized.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the content of the closed period suggesting production is changed to the content of suggesting the end of the special gaming state by the production changing means, so that the special gaming state has ended. It is possible for the player to recognize the fact. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game can be interrupted and take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with a sharpness.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, and whether the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means. A dynamic display execution determining means for determining whether or not the effect varying means is determined to be a predetermined determination result by the operation determining means, and the dynamic display execution determining means determines the dynamic of the identification information. A game machine D3, wherein the content of the closed period suggestive effect is changed when it is determined that the display is not executed.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is executed by the dynamic display execution means, and whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means is dynamically displayed. It is determined by the determination means. Then, in the effect varying means, when it is determined by the operation determining means that the result is a predetermined determination result, and when the dynamic display execution determining means determines that the dynamic display of the identification information is not being performed, the closed period suggesting effect is produced. The content of is variable.

As a result, the player who confirms that the content of the closed period suggestive effect has been changed can be made to recognize that the privilege game state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game can be interrupted and take a break or the like. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with a sharpness.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the content of the closing period suggesting effect is changed, the effect changing unit is the closing period suggesting effect before the changing effect period of the closing period suggesting effect is changed. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that the contents are changed so as to be shorter than the production period.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the content of the closed period suggesting effect is changed by the effect changing means, the effect period of the closed period suggesting effect after the change is variable. Since the content is changed so as to be shorter than the effect period of the previous closed period suggestive effect, it can be recognized earlier that the game can be interrupted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with a sharpness.

In the gaming machine D4, the effect execution means suggests the end of the privilege game state when the predetermined lottery result is not obtained by the lottery means within a predetermined period after the end of the privilege game state In order to execute the suggested effect, the effect changing means, when changing the content of the closed period suggested effect, changes the content of the closed period suggested effect to the content of the end suggested effect. Characteristic game machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D4, when the predetermined lottery result is not obtained within a predetermined period after the privilege gaming state ends, an end suggestion indicating the end of the privilege gaming state The effect is executed by the effect executing means. Then, when the content of the closed period suggestive effect is changed by the effect changing means, the content of the closed period suggestive effect is changed to the content of the end suggestive effect.

This allows the player to be informed earlier that the privilege game state has ended, so that it is possible to recognize earlier that the game can be interrupted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to play a game with a sharpness.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the operation determination means determines the predetermined value when the operation determination means determines that the player has not performed an operation for causing the shooting means to shoot a ball for a certain period. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being determined to be the determination result of.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines D1 to D5, it is determined that the player has not performed an operation for causing the launching means to shoot a ball for a certain period. In this case, the operation determination means determines that the result is a predetermined determination result, so that the player can be informed earlier that the privilege game state has ended, and the player can restart the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing.

In the gaming machine D6, an operation detecting means for repeatedly detecting whether or not the player is performing an operation for causing the launching means to shoot a ball is provided with a predetermined cycle, and the operation determining means is the above-mentioned. A gaming machine D7 characterized in that when the operation detecting means continuously detects that the player is not operating a predetermined number of times, the result is the predetermined determination result. ..

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, whether or not the player is performing an operation for causing the launching means to shoot a ball is repeatedly detected by the operation detecting means at a predetermined cycle. When the operation detecting means continuously detects that the player's operation is not performed a predetermined number of times, the operation determining means determines that the result is the predetermined determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the operation is performed.

In the gaming machine D7, the detection means is composed of a touch sensor that detects whether or not the player is touching the firing means, and the operation determination means is such that the player touches the firing means by the operation detection means. A gaming machine D8, which determines that the predetermined determination result is obtained when it continuously detects a predetermined number of times.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D7, the game machine D8 is provided with a detection unit composed of a touch sensor for detecting whether or not the player touches the launching unit. If the operation determination means determines that the result is the predetermined determination result when the non-contact with the firing means is continuously detected a predetermined number of times, it is determined whether or not the player intends to fire the ball. The effect is that the can be determined more accurately.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closed period is set to a period of a specific length, and the effect execution means closes the period of the same length as the period of the specific length. A gaming machine D9, which is for performing a period suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the closed period suggesting effect is executed by the effect executing means in a period having the same length as the closing period, so that the closed period suggesting effect is produced. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the period to be executed and the closed period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the privilege game state is continuing for a long time, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

<Characteristic E group> (make it easy to store the special figure 2 hold during a big hit)
A game in which a ball is allowed to enter and a game state is set to either a first state or a second state which is a game state in which the ball is easier to enter the ball inlet than the first state. A predetermined lottery is performed based on the establishment of a lottery condition using a state setting means, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on a ball entering the entrance, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. The lottery means, the privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on a specific lottery result by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means, the lottery A gaming machine E1 comprising: a storage means capable of storing until a lottery is performed by means, wherein the gaming state setting means sets the second state during the privilege gaming state.

The gaming machine E1 has the following effects. That is, the game state is set by the game state setting means to either the first state or the second state which is a game state in which the ball is easier to enter the ball entrance than the first state. In addition, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the ball entering the entrance. When the lottery conditions are met, a predetermined lottery using the acquired information is performed by the lottery means, and based on the particular lottery result being a specific lottery result, a privilege advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means The state is shifted to the gaming state. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means until the lottery means performs the lottery. Then, the second state is set by the game state setting means during the privilege game state.

As a result, in the privilege game state, the ball is set to a game state in which a ball easily enters the ball entrance, so that the information is easily acquired by the acquisition means during the privilege game state. Therefore, since more information is stored by the storage means by the end of the privilege game state, it is possible to facilitate the predetermined lottery after the end of the privilege game state.

In the gaming machine E1, a value-added entrance to which a predetermined value is added by entering the ball, and the state of the value-added entrance, the open state in which the ball can enter and the entrance of the ball Is set in the privilege game state of 1 and a closed state in which the value-added entrance is closed by the open/close setting means. The predetermined period is provided with period setting means and effect executing means for executing a closed period suggesting effect that is an effect that pseudo-indicates that the period is the closed period in a predetermined period after the privilege game state has ended. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that a lottery by the lottery means is a period of a length capable of being executed a plurality of times.

The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1. That is, a predetermined valuable value is given by the ball entering the value-adding entrance, and the state of the value-adding entrance is limited to the open state where the ball can enter and the entrance of the ball. The closed state is set by the opening/closing setting means in the one privilege game state, and the closing period setting means sets a closed period which is a period in which the state of the value-added entrance is closed by the opening/closing setting means. The effect execution means sets a closed period suggesting effect that is an effect suggesting that the privilege gaming state is a closed period in a predetermined period after the bonus game state has ended. In addition, the lottery is performed a plurality of times during the predetermined period.

This allows the player to feel as if the privilege game state is continuing while the closed period suggesting effect is being executed, and thus makes the player feel as if the privilege game state is continuing for a long time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E2, the storage means is provided with a predetermined upper limit for the number of pieces of information that can be stored, and the predetermined period is the number of times equal to or larger than the predetermined upper limit by the lottery means. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that the lottery has a period of at least an executable length.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, a predetermined upper limit value is set for the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means, and during a predetermined period of time, the lottery means performs a predetermined upper limit value or more. Since the lottery can be executed a number of times, a specific lottery result is obtained during execution of the closed period suggesting effect, and it is possible to easily shift to the privilege game state. Therefore, the bonus game state and the closed period suggesting effect can be easily repeated, and the player can feel as if the bonus game state continues for a long time. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball entrance is aimed at the value-added entrance, as compared to the case where the player hits the ball without aiming at the value-added entrance. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that one is provided at a position where the ball can easily enter.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a ball aiming at the value-added entrance is compared to the case where the player hits the ball without aiming at the value-added entrance. Since the ball entrance is provided at a position where the ball can easily enter, the ball launched aiming at the value-added entrance to obtain a predetermined game value during the privilege game state is It becomes easier to enter the ball entrance, and the information becomes easier to be acquired by the acquisition means. Therefore, there is an effect that more information can be stored in the storage means during the privilege game state.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the gaming state setting means sets the second state when initial setting is executed for the gaming machine E5.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the second state is set by the gaming state setting means when the initial setting for the gaming machine is executed. It is possible to match the game state in and the game state set when the initial setting is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming state in the privilege gaming state can be changed to the gaming state in accordance with the gaming rules.

In the gaming machine E5, the gaming state setting means can set the first state based on the end of the privilege gaming state, the gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the first state is set by the gaming state setting means based on the end of the privilege gaming state, so that the second state continues endlessly and the gaming machine exits. As a result of increasing the sphere rate, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive stimulation of the player's spirit of gambling.

<Characteristic F group> (varies the payout speed of prize balls during jackpot)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on a specific lottery result by the lottery means, and entry of a ball is permitted. In the privilege game state, the state of the entrance is set to one of the following states: A permission setting means for setting a permission state, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects when a ball enters the entrance, and a value object for paying out by the payout means. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a varying means for varying a payout time required.

The gaming machine F1 has the following effects. That is, based on the specific lottery result by the lottery means, the state is shifted to the privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means. In the privilege game state, the state of the ball entrance is set by the permission setting means to a ball entrance permission state in which the ball is allowed to enter, and when the ball enters the ball entrance, a predetermined number of predetermined The valuable object is paid out by the payout means, and the payout time required for paying out the valuable object by the payout means is changed by the changing means.

As a result, it is possible to inflate the way in which the valuable object is paid out during the privilege game state, so that the player can be entertained not only by the amount of the valuable object paid out but also by the way in which the valuable object is paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the privilege game state is configured to have a plurality of entry permission periods, which are periods during which the entry permission unit sets the entry permission state, and the variable unit is one of the advantages. Of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the gaming state, the payout time in the entry permission period set in the latter half is longer than the payout time in the entry permission period set in the first half. The gaming machine F2, wherein the payout time is variable as described above.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, in the privilege game state, it is configured to have a plurality of entry permission periods which are periods set by the entry permission means to the entry permission state. Further, the variable means is a payout time in the entry permission period set in the latter half of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the one privilege game state, and a payout time in the entry permission period set in the first half. The payout time can be changed to be longer than that.

As a result, the valuable object can be continuously paid out even after the privilege game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the special game state while the valuable object is being paid out, even after the special game state is finished. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the privilege game state is set between the plurality of entry permission periods and the plurality of entry permission periods, and the state of the entry port is set to the entry restriction state. A suggestion effect executing means configured to have a limit entry effect period that is a period and is configured to have a limit suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the entry restriction period after the privilege game state is finished. A gaming machine F3 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the privilege game state is set between a plurality of entry permission periods and a plurality of entry permission periods, and the entry restriction period is a period in which the state of the entry port is set to the entry restriction state. Composed of. Then, after the privilege game state is finished, the suggestion effect executing means executes a limit suggestion effect that is an effect that suggests that it is the entry restriction period.

With this, even after the bonus game state is finished, the player can feel as if the bonus game state is in effect while the restriction suggesting effect is being executed. Further, since the valuable object continues to be provided even after the bonus game state ends, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the valuable object to which the valuable object is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the period during which the restriction suggesting effect is being executed and the entry restriction period, so that the player feels that the privilege game state lasts longer than it actually is. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and the motor rotates by a predetermined rotation amount to pay out the predetermined number of units of valuable objects. The gaming machine F4, wherein the payout time is varied by varying the rotation speed of the motor.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effect is produced. That is, the payout means has a motor, and a predetermined unit number of valuable objects are paid out by rotating the motor by a predetermined rotation amount. Then, in the changing means, the payout time is changed by changing the rotation speed of the motor.

Thereby, there is an effect that an arbitrary payout time can be accurately set by electrical control of the motor.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the payout means has a motor, and the motor is rotated by a predetermined rotation amount to pay out the predetermined number of valuable objects, and the motor is A rotation amount determination means for determining whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, and when the rotation amount determination means determines that the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, the operation of the motor is performed for a predetermined period. A gaming machine F5, which is provided with a stopping means for stopping.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the following effect is produced. That is, the payout means has a motor, and a predetermined unit number of valuable objects are paid out by rotating the motor by a predetermined rotation amount. Then, the rotation amount determination means determines whether or not the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, and when the rotation amount determination means determines that the motor has rotated by a specific rotation amount, the operation of the motor is stopped. It is stopped for a predetermined period by the means.

This makes it possible to prevent the motor from continuously rotating even when a large amount of valuable objects are dispensed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from being defective due to the motor heating due to the continuous operation.

In the gaming machine F5, the varying means is configured to vary the payout time by varying the predetermined period, the gaming machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F5, the predetermined period can be varied and the payout time can be varied by the variable means, so that the rotation speed of the motor can be unified. Therefore, there is an effect that control of the motor can be simplified.

In the gaming machine F5, the varying means is capable of varying the payout time by varying the specific rotation amount.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, the variable amount changes the specific rotation amount and the payout time is variable, so that the payout time can be easily controlled by electric control of the motor. The effect is that you can.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a storage means for storing the regulation information defined in association with the set number of times of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the privilege game state in which the payout time is 1 The gaming machine F8, characterized in that the varying means varies the payout time based on the regulation information.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the payout time is defined in association with the set number of times of a plurality of entry permission period information set in the privilege game state of one. The specified information is stored in the storage means, and the payout time is changed by the changing means based on the specified information. Therefore, the payout time can be changed by a simple process of reading and setting the information stored in the storage means. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the variable unit can be reduced.

<Characteristic G group> (Sends a signal to stop the ball supply to the island equipment)
A lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, a privilege game transition means for shifting the state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on a specific lottery result by the lottery means, and entry of a ball is permitted. In the privilege game state, the state of the entrance is set to one of the following states: A permission setting means for setting a permission state, a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of valuable objects when a ball enters the entrance, and the valuable object paid out by the payout means A supply instruction means for instructing the supply of the valuable object to an external supply means that can be supplied from the outside of the machine, and the supply instruction means specifies the supply of the valuable object based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A gaming machine G1 characterized by instructing the external supply means to stop only for a period.

The gaming machine G1 has the following effects. That is, a predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the state is shifted to the privilege game state advantageous to the player by the privilege game transition means based on the specific lottery result by the lottery means. In the privilege game state, the state of the ball entrance is set by the permission setting means to a ball entry permission state in which entry of the ball is permitted. When a ball enters the ball entrance, a predetermined number of valuable objects are paid out by the payout means, and the valuable object paid out by the payout means is supplied to the external supply means that can be supplied from outside the gaming machine. On the other hand, the supply instruction means instructs the supply of the valuable object. Here, the supply instruction means instructs the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

As a result, it is possible to inflate the way in which the valuable object is paid out during the privilege game state, so that the player can be entertained not only by the amount of the valuable object paid out but also by the way in which the valuable object is paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the supply instruction means is provided with condition setting means for setting a trigger condition for instructing the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period, and the privilege game is provided. The state is configured to have a plurality of entry permission periods, which are periods set in the entry permission state by the entry permission means, and the condition setting means is set to one in the privilege game state. Of the above-mentioned entry permission period, the trigger condition set in the entry permission period set in the latter half is easier to be satisfied than the trigger condition set in the entry permission period set in the first half A gaming machine G2, characterized in that the trigger condition is set to.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, the condition setting means sets the trigger condition that triggers the external supply means to stop the supply of the valuable object for a specific period. The privilege game state is configured to have a plurality of entry permission periods, which are periods set by the entry permission means to the entry permission state. Of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the 1 privilege game state, the trigger condition set in the entry permission period set in the latter half is the one set in the entry permission period set in the first half The trigger condition is set by the condition setting means so as to be more easily established.

As a result, in the entry permission period set in the latter half, it is possible to lengthen the period required to be provided with the valuable object, so that the valuable object can be continuously paid out even after the privilege game state ends. it can. Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the special game state while the valuable object is being paid out, even after the special game state is finished. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, the privilege game state is set between the plurality of entry permission periods and the plurality of entry permission periods, and the state of the entry port is set to the entry limitation state. A suggestion effect executing means configured to have a limit entry effect period that is a period and is configured to have a limit suggestion effect that is an effect suggesting that it is the entry restriction period after the privilege game state is finished. A gaming machine G3 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2. That is, the privilege game state is a period during which a plurality of entry permission periods and a plurality of entry permission periods are set, and the entry opening state is a period during which the entry restriction state is set. Is configured. Further, after the privilege game state is finished, the suggestion effect executing means executes a limit suggestion effect that is an effect that suggests that the game is in the entry restriction period.

As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the privilege game state continues even after the privilege game state ends. Further, since the valuable object continues to be provided even after the bonus game state ends, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the valuable object to which the valuable object is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the period during which the restriction suggesting effect is being executed and the entry restriction period, so that the player feels that the privilege game state lasts longer than it actually is. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the condition setting means stops the supply of the valuable object for a specific period in a certain cycle in the entry permission period of 1, and in the privilege game state of 1. Of the plurality of entry permission periods set, the fixed cycle set in the entry permission period set in the latter half is the fixed cycle set in the entry permission period set in the first half. A gaming machine G4, characterized in that the fixed period is set to be shorter than the period.

The gaming machine G4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2 or G3. That is, in one entry permission period, the condition setting means stops the supply of the valuable object for every specific period for a specific period. Of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the 1 privilege game state, the fixed cycle set in the entry permission period set in the latter half is the one set in the entry permission period set in the first half The fixed period is set to be shorter than the period.

As a result, the supply of the valuable object is more likely to be stopped in the entry permission period set in the latter half, so that the time required to apply the valuable object can be lengthened. Therefore, since the valuable object can be continuously paid out even after the privilege game state is ended, the bonus game can be paid to the player while the valuable object is paid out even after the privilege game state is ended. You can immerse yourself in the afterglow of the state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G4, the certain period includes a storage unit that stores the regulation information defined in association with the set number of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the privilege game state of 1, and the condition is satisfied. The game machine G5, wherein the setting means sets the predetermined period based on the regulation information.

The gaming machine G5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4. That is, the predetermined period is stored in the storage means in association with the predetermined number of times the plurality of entry permission periods set in one privilege game state are set. Then, a constant cycle is set by the condition setting means based on the regulation information.

Thereby, the condition setting means can set a fixed cycle by a simple process of selecting a cycle from the regulation information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the condition setting means can be reduced.

<Characteristic H group> (Based on the look-ahead result, the effect that spans multiple changes is set)
Performance executing means for executing performance, acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and lottery means thereof By a special game transition means for shifting the state to a special advantageous game state for the player when a specific lottery result is obtained, and a ball entrance into which a predetermined value is added by the ball entering, As the state of the ball entrance, the opening/closing setting means for setting a pattern of an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball is restricted to enter in the privilege game state of 1, and the opening/closing setting means Closed period setting means for setting a closed period which is a period in which the state of the entrance is in the closed state, and dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on a lottery result by the lottery means. Storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the lottery condition is satisfied, and the predetermined lottery before the lottery condition is satisfied by using the information stored in the storage means. A pre-lottery means for executing a plurality of, including a dynamic display of the identification information showing the specific lottery result, when the specific lottery result by the pre-lottery means A gaming machine H1 characterized by comprising effect varying means capable of varying the content of the closed period suggesting effect over the dynamic display of the identification information.

The gaming machine H1 has the following effects. That is, the effect is executed by the effect executing means. When the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the predetermined lottery is executed by the information, and the specific lottery result is obtained by the lottery means, the game is played by the privilege game transition means. The state is shifted to a privilege game state that is advantageous to the player. Then, a predetermined value is given by the ball entering the entrance, and the state of the entrance is an open state in which the ball can enter and a closed state in which the entry of the ball is restricted. The pattern is set by the opening/closing setting means in the one privilege game state, and the closing period setting means sets the closing period which is a period in which the state of the entrance is closed by the opening/closing setting means. The dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the storage means until the lottery conditions are met, and the predetermined lottery is performed in advance by the pre-lottery means before the lottery conditions are met using the information stored in the storage means. It Here, when the specific lottery result is obtained by the preliminary lottery means, the content of the closed period suggestive effect is over the dynamic display of the plurality of identification information including the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific lottery result. It is changed by the effect changing means. As a result, if the effect is changed by the effect changing means, it is possible to expect the player to expect the special game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the effect executing means executes a closed period suggesting effect that is an effect suggesting the closed period in a predetermined period after the privilege game state is finished, and the effect is generated. The game machine H2, wherein the changing means changes the content of the closed period suggestive effect during execution of the closed period suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, during the predetermined period after the privilege game state is finished, the effect execution means performs the inter-trigger suggestion effect, which is the suggestion effect that it is the closed period. During execution of the closed period suggesting effect, the contents of the intimidating suggesting effect are changed by the effect changing means. Thereby, a plurality of privilege game states can be made to appear as if they are one privilege game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the pre-lottery means results in the specific lottery result, a period discriminating means for discriminating a period until the privilege game state is started based on the specific lottery result. It is provided that the effect varying means is for varying the content of the closed period suggesting effect when it is determined by the period determining means that the privilege game state is started after the predetermined period is exceeded. Characteristic gaming machine H3.

The gaming machine H3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2. That is, when the specific lottery result is obtained by the preliminary lottery means, the period determination means determines the period until the privilege game state is started based on the specific lottery result. Further, when it is determined by the period determination means that the privilege game state is started after the predetermined period has been exceeded, the content of the closed period suggesting production is changed by the production varying device. As a result, when the length of the closed period suggesting effect becomes long, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation of the privilege game state is high, and thus there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H3, variable time specification for specifying the time when the contents of the closed period suggesting effect is changed by the effect changing means based on the period until the privilege game state determined by the period determining means is started. A gaming machine H4 comprising means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, the contents of the closed period suggesting effect are changed by the effect changing means based on the period until the multi-privilege gaming state is started as determined by the period determining means. Since the time is specified by the variable time specifying device, the execution period of the effect after being changed by the effect changing device can be made constant regardless of the number of times and the execution period of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed. There is an effect.

The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, shift to a winning state when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening is a win. Some of these gaming machines are provided with a plurality of types of winning that differ in the total number of award balls that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in such a gaming machine, since the prize balls are paid out in a fixed manner, the prize balls are monotonously obtained, and the player may not be able to enjoy the winning game.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is in a state of a privilege game state advantageous for the player based on a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery and a specific lottery result by the lottery means. A privilege game transfer means for transferring, a ball entry permission state in which the ball entry is permitted, and a ball entry port set in one of the entry restriction states in which the ball entry is restricted, Permission setting means for setting the state of the entrance to the entrance permission state in the privilege game state, and paying a predetermined number of valuable objects predetermined when the ball enters the entrance It is provided with a payout means for paying out and a varying means for varying the payout time required for paying out the valuable object by the payout means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the privilege game state is a period during which a plurality of entry permission periods are set in the entry permission state by the entry permission means. The variable means is configured to have, and the payout time in the entry permission period set in the latter half of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the one privilege game state is set in the first half. The payout time is varied so as to be longer than the payout time in the admission permission period.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the privilege game state is set between a plurality of the entry permission periods and the plurality of entry permission periods. It is configured to have a ball entry restriction period, which is a period in which the state of the filled-in ball entrance is set to the ball entry restriction state, and suggests that the ball entry restriction period is set after the privilege game state is finished. The suggestion effect executing means for executing the restriction suggestion effect, which is an effect to be performed, is provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the state is shifted to the privilege game state which is advantageous to the player by the privilege game shifting unit based on the specific lottery result by the lottery unit. In the privilege game state, the state of the ball entrance is set by the permission setting means to a ball entrance permission state in which the ball is allowed to enter, and when the ball enters the ball entrance, a predetermined number of predetermined The valuable object is paid out by the payout means, and the payout time required for paying out the valuable object by the payout means is changed by the changing means.
As a result, it is possible to inflate the way in which the valuable object is paid out during the privilege game state, so that the player can be entertained not only by the amount of the valuable object paid out but also by the way in which the valuable object is paid out. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the privilege game state, it is configured to have a plurality of entry permission periods which are periods set by the entry permission means to the entry permission state. Further, the variable means is a payout time in the entry permission period set in the latter half of the plurality of entry permission periods set in the one privilege game state, and a payout time in the entry permission period set in the first half. The payout time can be changed to be longer than that.
As a result, the valuable object can be continuously paid out even after the privilege game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the special game state while the valuable object is being paid out even after the special game state is finished. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the privilege game state is set between a plurality of ball entry permission periods and the plurality of ball entry permission periods, and a ball entry restriction period in which the state of the ball entrance is set to the ball entry restriction state. Composed of. Then, after the privilege game state ends, the limit suggestion effect that is an effect indicating that it is the entry restriction period is executed by the suggestion effect executing means.
With this, even after the bonus game state ends, the player can feel as if the bonus game state is in effect while the restriction suggesting effect is being executed. Further, since the valuable object continues to be provided even after the privilege game state is finished, the player's consciousness can be directed to the valuable object to which the valuable object is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the period in which the restriction suggestion effect is executed and the entry restriction period, and thus to make the player feel that the privilege game state lasts longer than it actually is. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines )
65a Specific prize hole (ball entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
S212 portion of some S503, S505 determination period setting means of the determination means S213 benefits game execution means S305 dynamic display execution means S403, S405 determination period setting unit S1203, S1206 ON sphere state setting means S1617 specific effect performed manually stage

Claims (1)

A determination unit for performing Jo Tokoro determination,
And benefits game execution means for executing an advantageous benefits game to Yu technique person based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means becomes the determination result of the specific,
A determination period determining unit that determines a determination period that is a period until the determination result is displayed based on the determination result of the determination unit,
A ball entering means for giving a predetermined privilege by entering a game ball,
As the state of the ball entering means, a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the game ball than in the first state are set in the privilege game of 1. Sphere state setting means,
Period setting means for setting a second state period during which the state of the ball entering means is set to the second state by the ball entering state setting means ;
A game suggested by a second state production mode which is a production mode executed at least during the second state period based on the end of the first state finally set in the privilege game of 1. Specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect capable of suggesting the same game,
As a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, a first specific effect of a mode suggested to be in the first state, and being less likely to be in the first state than the first specific effect And a type determining means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a predetermined specific effect period,
The specific effect is at least executed in at least one of the determination periods set after the privilege game is finished,
The specific effect period is configured by an effect period of a length in which, when the first specific effect is executed, the first specific effect is ended in synchronization with the start of the privilege game. A gaming machine to do.